WO2022048655A1 - 资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点 - Google Patents

资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022048655A1
WO2022048655A1 PCT/CN2021/116560 CN2021116560W WO2022048655A1 WO 2022048655 A1 WO2022048655 A1 WO 2022048655A1 CN 2021116560 W CN2021116560 W CN 2021116560W WO 2022048655 A1 WO2022048655 A1 WO 2022048655A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
80mhz
indication
bits
equal
indicates
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2021/116560
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
狐梦实
于健
淦明
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to EP21863717.1A priority Critical patent/EP4203583A4/en
Publication of WO2022048655A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022048655A1/zh
Priority to US18/178,168 priority patent/US20230209525A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453—Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0044—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path allocation of payload
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0092—Indication of how the channel is divided
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0091—Signaling for the administration of the divided path
    • H04L5/0094—Indication of how sub-channels of the path are allocated
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0457—Variable allocation of band or rate
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00—Network topologies
    • H04W84/02—Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/10—Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/12—WLAN [Wireless Local Area Networks]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/08—Access point devices
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0001—Arrangements for dividing the transmission path
    • H04L5/0003—Two-dimensional division
    • H04L5/0005—Time-frequency
    • H04L5/0007—Time-frequency the frequencies being orthogonal, e.g. OFDM(A), DMT

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a resource unit indication method, an access point, and a station.
  • non-AP STA non-access point station
  • RUs resource units
  • user data is carried on some resource units instead of occupying the entire channel, thereby It is realized that multiple users can transmit in parallel at the same time in each time period, and there is no need to wait in line and compete with each other, which improves the efficiency of frequency utilization.
  • the access point In the downlink, the access point (AP) can determine the allocation of RUs according to the priority of the downlink data of each non-access point site, but in the uplink, the AP needs to inform the terminal through a trigger frame
  • the trigger frame includes multiple user information fields, and one user information field includes information that a station needs to read.
  • the M user information fields are the information that needs to be read by the non-access point station 1 to the non-access point station M respectively.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield in the user information field is used to indicate the resource unit to which the non-access point station is allocated.
  • non-access point stations may transmit data packets on the allocated resource units. However, since some non-access point sites need to send a large amount of data, more resource units need to be allocated. Therefore, how to use the resource unit allocation subfield to allocate multiple resources to the corresponding non-access point sites Units are a pressing problem.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a resource unit indication method, an access point, and a site, which can allocate multiple resource units to a corresponding non-access point site.
  • the present application provides a resource unit indication method.
  • a station receives a trigger frame from an access point; the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to the station, and the resource unit
  • the allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRU allocated to the station, and the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest resource unit RU in the MRU is located; further, the station can The allocated MRU is determined according to the resource unit indication and the frequency band range indication.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the frequency band range where the smallest RU in the MRU is located.
  • the frequency band range indication described in this application carries more information, thereby helping to save the number of indexes required by the resource unit indication for indicating each MRU.
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 80 MHz where the smallest RU among the MRUs is located. That is to say, the granularity of the frequency band range in which the smallest RU among the MRUs indicated by the frequency band range indication is 80 MHz.
  • the frequency band range indication can know the position of the 80MHz where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located. In this way, the resource unit indication can indicate the corresponding MRU under this condition. For the same number of MRUs, it is beneficial to reduce the requirement for resource unit indication. index number.
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 40MHz where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located. That is to say, the granularity of the frequency band range in which the smallest RU among the MRUs indicated by the frequency band range indication is 40 MHz.
  • the frequency band range indication can know the location of the 40MHz where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located. In this way, the resource unit indication can indicate the corresponding MRU under this condition. For the same number of MRUs, it is beneficial to reduce the resource unit indication requirements. index number.
  • the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication may be one of the two 40MHz covered by the 996-tone RU, or The predefinition is the 40MHz with the lowest frequency among the two 40MHz covered by the 996-tone RU, or the 40MHz with the highest frequency among the two 40MHz covered by the 996-tone RU.
  • the frequency band range indication may indicate the frequency band range where one of the smallest RUs is located.
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 160 MHz where the smallest RU among the MRUs is located. In another embodiment, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 240 MHz where the smallest RU among the MRUs is located. In yet another embodiment, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 320 MHz where the smallest RU among the MRUs is located.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication actually refers to which frequency band range in the bandwidth, or the position of the frequency band range in the bandwidth.
  • the 80MHz indicated by the above frequency band range indication is actually one 80MHz in the bandwidth, or is actually the position of the 80MHz in the bandwidth.
  • MRUs may include but are not limited to the following items:
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes a resource unit (26-tone RU) with a size of 26 subcarriers and a resource unit (52-tone RU) with a size of 52 subcarriers, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 26 - the frequency band range in which the tone RU is located; or
  • the MRU indicated by the resource element indication includes one RU (106-tone RU) with a size of 106 subcarriers and one 26-tone RU, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the frequency band range where the 26-tone RU is located; or
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes a resource unit (484-tone RU) with a size of 484 subcarriers and a resource unit (242-tone RU) with a size of 242 subcarriers, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 242 - the frequency band range in which the tone RU is located; or
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes a resource unit (996-tone RU) with a size of 996 subcarriers and a 484-tone RU, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the frequency band range where the 484-tone RU is located; or
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes two 996-tone RUs and one 484-tone RU, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the frequency band range where the 484-tone RU is located; or
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes three 996-tone RUs, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the frequency band range where one of the 996-tone RUs is located; or
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes three 996-tone RUs and one 484-tone RU, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the frequency band range where the 484-tone RU is located; or
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes a 996-tone RU, a 484-tone RU and a 242-tone RU, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the frequency band range where the 242-tone RU is located.
  • the resource unit indication method described in this aspect is adopted, the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 80MHz where the 484-tone RU is located, and the (3*996 +484)-tone RU only needs two indexes to indicate a position of 484-tone RU in the 80MHz, which can inform the station of the allocated (3*996+484)-tone RU; or, the frequency band range indication indicates The frequency band range is 40MHz where the 484-tone RU is located, and the (3*996+484)-tone RU indicated by the resource unit indication only needs 1 index to inform the station of the allocated (3*996+484)-tone RU .
  • the resource unit indication also needs to indicate 8 indexes respectively, to inform the site of the allocated (3*996+484)-tone RU. Therefore, the resource unit indication method described in this aspect is beneficial to reduce the number of indexes required for resource unit indication.
  • the present application further provides a resource unit indication method, which corresponds to the resource unit indication method described in the first aspect, and is described from the perspective of an access point.
  • the access point determines a trigger frame; the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate allocation To the multi-resource unit MRU of the corresponding site, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest resource unit RU in the MRU is located; the access point sends the trigger frame.
  • this method can allocate MRUs to sites, which makes the allocation of MRUs more flexible and helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the access point needs to allocate MRUs to the stations, and the frequency band range indication can be used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located.
  • the frequency band range indication described in this application carries more information, such as the frequency band range where the smallest RU is located, which is helpful for saving the resource unit indication for indicating the index required by each MRU number.
  • the present application further provides a resource unit indication method, the method may include: the station receives a trigger frame; the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to the station, and the resource unit subfield includes a frequency band Range indication and resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRU allocated to the site, and the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU is located; the station determines to be allocated according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication the MRU.
  • this method can allocate MRUs to sites, which makes the allocation of MRUs more flexible and helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the station when it determines the allocated RU/MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication, it can determine the size of the allocated MRU according to the resource unit indication, and determine the frequency band range where the RU/MRU is located according to the frequency band range indication, and then determine the frequency range in which the RU/MRU is located. Determine the RU/MRU corresponding to the index indicated by the resource unit indication within the frequency band.
  • the resource unit indication can only indicate the RU/MRU in the frequency band, which reduces the number of indexes that the resource unit indication needs to indicate in order to indicate an MRU of this size. That is to say, in this method, the frequency band range indication can carry more information, and the logic of the resource unit indication is simplified as much as possible, which is beneficial to reduce the processing complexity of the station.
  • the MRUs that can be allocated by the station include but are not limited to the following items: including a resource unit (26-tone RU) with a size of 26 subcarriers and a resource unit (52-tone RU) with a size of 52 subcarriers tone RU) (denoted as (52+26)-tone RU); or including a RU with a size of 106 subcarriers (106-tone RU) and an MRU of 26-tone RU (denoted as (106+26) -tone RU); or an MRU that includes a resource unit of size 484 subcarriers (484-tone RU) and a resource unit of size 242 subcarriers (denoted as (484+242)-tone RU); or includes a A resource unit of size 996 subcarriers (996-tone RU) and an MRU of 484-tone RU (denoted as (996+484)-tone RU); or a resource unit consisting of two 996-tone
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one 80MHz in the bandwidth
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one 160MHz in the bandwidth
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one of 240MHz or 320MHz in the bandwidth;
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one 320 MHz in the bandwidth.
  • the resource element allocation subfield occupies 9 bits; the frequency band range indication occupies bits 0 to 1 of the 9 bits, and the resource element indication occupies bits 2 to 8.
  • the frequency band range indication can adopt four states represented by bit 0 and bit 1 to respectively indicate the frequency range in the 320MHz.
  • the frequency band range indication can adopt two states represented by bit 0 or bit 1 to indicate the two states in the 320MHz respectively. 160MHz; if the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 320MHz, the frequency band range indication may not limit the states of bit 0 and bit 1 to indicate 320MHz.
  • the frequency band range indication can adopt two states represented by bit 0 or bit 1 to indicate 320MHz respectively. in the two 240MHz.
  • the present application further provides a resource unit indication method, which corresponds to the resource unit indication method described in the third aspect, and is described from the perspective of an access point.
  • the resource unit indication method described in this aspect includes: the access point determines a trigger frame; the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication;
  • the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRU allocated to the corresponding station;
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU is located; the access point sends the trigger frame.
  • this method can allocate MRUs to sites, which makes the allocation of MRUs more flexible and helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the access point can use the frequency band range indicator to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU is located, and then determine the index of the resource unit indication in this frequency band range to inform the station of the assigned MRU.
  • the resource unit indication can only indicate the RU/MRU in the frequency band, which reduces the number of indexes that the resource unit indication needs to indicate in order to indicate an MRU of this size. That is to say, in this method, the frequency band range indication can carry more information, and the indication logic of the frequency band range indication and resource unit indication is simplified as much as possible, which is beneficial to reduce the processing complexity of the site.
  • the present application further provides a trigger frame received by a station from an access point;
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to the station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource Unit indication;
  • the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRU allocated to the station, and the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where some or all of the resource unit RUs in the bandwidth other than the MRU are located;
  • the station indicates according to the frequency band range and The resource unit indication determines the allocated MRU.
  • this method can allocate MRUs to sites, which makes the allocation of MRUs more flexible and helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is a frequency band range where some or all RUs other than the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication are located; or, the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is a frequency range other than that indicated by the resource unit indication.
  • the frequency band range outside the MRU, that is, the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the frequency band range smaller than the bandwidth, compared with the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the frequency band range corresponding to the bandwidth, there are It is beneficial to reduce the number of indexes required to indicate the resource unit indication.
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes three resource units (996-tone RUs) (denoted as 3*996-tone RUs) with a size of 996 subcarriers, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is The 80MHz where one 996-tone RU in the bandwidth other than 3*996-tone RU is located, or the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 80MHz in the bandwidth other than 3*996-tone RU. It can be seen that in this embodiment, when the resource unit indication is used to indicate 3*996-tone RUs, only one index is needed, and the station can determine the allocated MRU in combination with the frequency band range indication.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the lowest 80MHz related to 3*996-tone RU in the bandwidth. Since the lowest 80MHz related to 3*996-tone RU in the bandwidth is determined, the combination of 3*996-tone RU There are three types (that is, two 996-tone RUs are selected from the three 80MHz other than the lowest 80MHz in the bandwidth, and there are three combinations), so the resource unit indication needs to indicate one of the three indexes corresponding to the three combinations. The only MRU that tells the site to be assigned. Therefore, the meaning of the frequency band range indication described in this application is conducive to saving the number of indexes required for the indication of the resource unit.
  • the present application further provides a resource unit indication method, which corresponds to the resource unit indication method described in the fifth aspect, and is described from the perspective of an access point.
  • the method includes: the access point determines a trigger frame; the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield for indicating resource allocation to a station, the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate allocation To the multi-resource unit MRU of the corresponding site, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where part or all of the resource unit RUs other than the MRU in the bandwidth are located; the access point sends the trigger frame.
  • this method can allocate MRUs to sites, which makes the allocation of MRUs more flexible and helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is a frequency band range where some or all RUs other than the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication are located; or, the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is a frequency range other than that indicated by the resource unit indication.
  • the frequency band range outside the MRU, that is, the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the frequency band range smaller than the bandwidth, compared with the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the frequency band range corresponding to the bandwidth, there are It is beneficial to reduce the number of indexes required to indicate the resource unit indication.
  • the present application further provides a resource unit indication method, the method includes: a station receives a trigger frame from an access point; the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to the station, the resource unit allocation The subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band range in the bandwidth; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the MRU allocated to the station, and the MRU includes the frequency band range in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication the remaining resource unit RUs; the station determines the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • this method can allocate MRUs to sites, which makes the allocation of MRUs more flexible and helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is a combination of the remaining RUs in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication
  • the MRU to be indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the frequency band range corresponding to the bandwidth. It is beneficial to reduce the number of indexes required to indicate the resource unit indication.
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes three resource units (996-tone RUs) (denoted as 3*996-tone RUs) with a size of 996 subcarriers, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is One of the bandwidths is 80MHz, then the 3*996-tone RU includes the remaining three 996-tone RUs in the bandwidth except 80MHz. It can be seen that in this embodiment, when the resource unit indication is used to indicate 3*996-tone RUs, an index is required. Compared with the case where the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the lowest 80MHz related to 3*996-tone RUs in the bandwidth, the present application is beneficial to save the number of indices required for the resource unit indication.
  • the present application further provides a resource unit indication method, which corresponds to the resource unit indication method described in the seventh aspect, and is described from the perspective of an access point.
  • the method includes: the access point determines a trigger frame; the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield for indicating resource allocation to a station, the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a bandwidth A frequency band range in , the resource unit indication is used to indicate the MRU allocated to the corresponding station, and the MRU includes the remaining resource unit RUs in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication; the access point sends the trigger frame.
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is a combination of the remaining RUs in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication, compared with the MRU that needs to be indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the frequency band range corresponding to the bandwidth, It is beneficial to reduce the number of indexes required to indicate the resource unit indication.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield occupies N bits, and the number of bits occupied by the frequency range indication N bits is based on the bandwidth and the frequency range indicated by the frequency range indication Sure.
  • the frequency band range indication occupies bits 0 to bit x, the resource element indicates the occupied bit x+1 to bit N; the value of x is related to the bandwidth and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication; N and the x are both greater than zero .
  • the present application further provides a resource unit indication method, the method includes: a station receives a trigger frame from an access point; the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to the station, the resource unit allocation The subfield occupies N bits, and an index indicated by the N bits represents the absolute position of a multi-resource unit MRU in the bandwidth; N is greater than zero; the station determines the MRU corresponding to the index indicated by the N bits, which is the MRU allocated by the station .
  • the resource unit allocation subfield does not distinguish bits dedicated to indicating a certain frequency band range, and the corresponding MRU can be directly searched according to the index indicated by the N bits in the resource unit allocation subfield,
  • the processing logic is greatly simplified, which is beneficial to reduce the processing complexity of the site.
  • N is equal to nine.
  • the N bits are used to indicate the absolute position of the MRU in the bandwidth, including one or more of the following:
  • MRU including the first resource unit of size 996 subcarriers (996-tone RU) and the second 996-tone RU in 320MHz, or the third 996-tone RU and the fourth 996-tone RU in 320MHz MRU of tone RU; or,
  • MRU including first to fourth 996-tone RU in 320MHz; or,
  • the MRU including the second resource unit of 52 subcarriers (52-tone RU) and the second resource unit of 26 subcarriers (26-tone RU) in either 20MHz of 320MHz, or any of 320MHz
  • An MRU that includes the first or second resource unit of size 242 subcarriers (242-tone RU) and the second resource unit of size 484 subcarriers (484-tone RU) in any 80MHz of 320MHz, or MRU including the third or fourth 242-tone RU and the first 484-tone RU in any 80MHz of 320MHz; or,
  • MRU including the first or second 484-tone RU and the second resource unit (996-tone RU) of size 996 subcarriers in any 160MHz in 320MHz, or including the third in any 160MHz in 320MHz or the MRU of the fourth 484-tone RU and the second 996-tone RU; or,
  • MRUs including the first or second 484-tone RU and the second, third, and fourth 996-tone RUs in 320MHz or MRUs including the third or fourth 484-tone RU in 320MHz
  • MRUs including the third or fourth 484-tone RU in 320MHz One, third, fourth 996-tone RU, or MRU including fifth or sixth 484-tone RU and first, second, and fourth 996-tone RU in 320MHz , or an MRU including the seventh or eighth 484-tone RU and the first, second, and third 996-tone RU in 320MHz; or,
  • MRU including three of the 996-tone RUs in 320MHz; or,
  • the present application further provides a resource unit indication method, which corresponds to the resource unit indication method described in the ninth aspect, and is described from the perspective of an access point.
  • the method includes: an access point determines a trigger frame; the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield for indicating resource allocation to a station, the resource unit allocation subfield occupies N bits, and an index indicated by the N bits directly represents a multiple The absolute position of the resource unit MRU in the bandwidth; N is greater than zero; the access point sends the trigger frame.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield does not distinguish bits dedicated to indicating a certain frequency band range, and the corresponding MRU can be directly searched according to the index indicated by the N bits in the resource unit allocation subfield,
  • the processing logic is greatly simplified, which is beneficial to reduce the processing complexity of the site.
  • the present application further provides a communication device, the communication device having a part for implementing the site in the method example described in the first aspect, the third aspect, the fifth aspect, the seventh aspect, or the ninth aspect Or all the functions, for example, the function of the communication device may have the functions of some or all of the embodiments of the present application, and may also have the function of independently implementing any one of the embodiments of the present application.
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware, or can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units or modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the structure of the communication device may include a processing unit and a communication unit, and the processing unit is configured to support the communication device to perform the corresponding functions in the above method.
  • the communication unit is used to support communication between the communication device and other devices.
  • the communication device may further include a storage unit for coupling with the processing unit and the sending unit, which stores necessary program instructions and data of the communication device.
  • the communication device implements the relevant functions of the site in the first aspect, and the communication device includes:
  • a communication unit for receiving a trigger frame from an access point
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate multiple resources allocated to the station a unit MRU, where the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest resource unit RU in the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located;
  • a processing unit configured to determine the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the processing unit may be a processor
  • the communication unit may be a transceiver or a communication interface
  • the storage unit may be a memory.
  • the communication device implements the relevant functions of the site in the third aspect, and the communication device includes:
  • a communication unit for receiving a trigger frame from an access point
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to the station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate allocation to the station.
  • the multi-resource unit MRU, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU is located;
  • a processing unit configured to determine the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the communication device implements the related functions of the site in the fifth aspect, and the communication device includes:
  • a communication unit for receiving a trigger frame from an access point
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to the station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate allocation to the station.
  • the multi-resource unit MRU, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where part or all of the resource unit RUs other than the MRU in the bandwidth are located;
  • a processing unit configured to determine the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the communication device implements the related functions of the site in the seventh aspect, and the communication device includes:
  • a communication unit for receiving a trigger frame from an access point
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to the station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication;
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band in the bandwidth a range;
  • the resource unit indication is used to indicate an MRU allocated to the station, and the MRU includes resource units RUs remaining in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication;
  • a processing unit configured to determine the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the communication apparatus may also implement related functions of the site in other aspects, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the communication device implements the relevant functions of the site in the first aspect, and may include:
  • a transceiver for receiving trigger frames from an access point
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate multiple resources allocated to the station a unit MRU, where the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest resource unit RU in the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located;
  • the processor is configured to determine the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the communication device implements the relevant functions of the site in the third aspect, and the communication device includes:
  • a transceiver for receiving trigger frames from an access point
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to the station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate allocation to the station.
  • the multi-resource unit MRU, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU is located;
  • the processor is configured to determine the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the communication apparatus may also implement related functions of the site in other aspects, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the present application further provides a communication device, the communication device having the access point in the method example described in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the sixth aspect, the eighth aspect, or the tenth aspect.
  • Some or all of the functions of the communication device for example, the function of the communication device may have the functions of some or all of the embodiments in this application, and may also have the function of implementing any one of the embodiments in this application alone.
  • the functions can be implemented by hardware, or can be implemented by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more units or modules corresponding to the above functions.
  • the structure of the communication device may include a processing unit and a communication unit, and the processing unit is configured to support the communication device to perform the corresponding functions in the above method.
  • the communication unit is used to support communication between the communication device and other devices.
  • the communication device may further include a storage unit for coupling with the processing unit and the sending unit, which stores necessary program instructions and data of the communication device.
  • the communication device implements the relevant functions of the access point in the second aspect, and the communication device includes:
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate multiple resources allocated to the corresponding station. a unit MRU, where the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest resource unit RU in the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located;
  • a communication unit configured to send the trigger frame.
  • the communication apparatus implements the relevant functions of the access point in the fourth aspect, and the communication apparatus includes:
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate multiple resources allocated to the corresponding station. resource unit MRU; the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU is located;
  • a communication unit configured to send the trigger frame.
  • the communication apparatus implements the related functions of the access point in the sixth aspect, and the communication apparatus includes:
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate multiple resources allocated to the corresponding station. a resource unit MRU, where the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band range where part or all of the resource unit RUs other than the MRU in the bandwidth are located;
  • a communication unit configured to send the trigger frame.
  • the communication device implements the related functions of the access point in the eighth aspect, and the communication device includes:
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield for indicating resource allocation to a station, the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band range in the bandwidth, The resource unit indication is used to indicate an MRU allocated to a corresponding station, and the MRU includes resource units RUs remaining in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication;
  • a communication unit configured to send the trigger frame.
  • the processing unit may be a processor
  • the communication unit may be a transceiver or a communication interface
  • the storage unit may be a memory.
  • the communication apparatus may also implement the related functions of the access point in other aspects, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the communication device implementing the related functions of the access point in the second aspect may include:
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate multiple resources allocated to the corresponding station. a unit MRU, where the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest resource unit RU in the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located;
  • a transceiver for sending the trigger frame.
  • the communication device implements the relevant functions of the access point in the fourth aspect, and may include:
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate multiple resources allocated to the corresponding station. resource unit MRU; the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU is located;
  • a transceiver for sending the trigger frame.
  • the communication apparatus implements the related functions of the access point in the sixth aspect, and the communication apparatus includes:
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate multiple resources allocated to the corresponding station. a resource unit MRU, where the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band range where part or all of the resource unit RUs other than the MRU in the bandwidth are located;
  • a transceiver for sending the trigger frame.
  • the communication device implements the related functions of the access point in the eighth aspect, and the communication device includes:
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield for indicating resource allocation to a station, the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band range in the bandwidth, The resource unit indication is used to indicate an MRU allocated to a corresponding station, and the MRU includes resource units RUs remaining in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication;
  • a transceiver for sending the trigger frame.
  • the communication apparatus may also implement the related functions of the access point in other aspects, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor may be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, baseband related processing
  • the transceiver may be used to perform, for example, but not limited to, radio frequency transmission and reception.
  • the above-mentioned devices may be respectively arranged on chips that are independent of each other, or at least part or all of them may be arranged on the same chip.
  • processors can be further divided into analog baseband processors and digital baseband processors.
  • the analog baseband processor can be integrated with the transceiver on the same chip, and the digital baseband processor can be set on a separate chip. With the continuous development of integrated circuit technology, more and more devices can be integrated on the same chip.
  • a digital baseband processor can be combined with a variety of application processors (such as but not limited to graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.) integrated on the same chip.
  • application processors such as but not limited to graphics processors, multimedia processors, etc.
  • Such a chip may be referred to as a system on chip. Whether each device is independently arranged on different chips or integrated on one or more chips often depends on the specific needs of product design. The embodiment of the present invention does not limit the specific implementation form of the above device.
  • the present application further provides a processor for executing the various methods of the first aspect, the third aspect, the fifth aspect, the seventh aspect, or the ninth aspect, or executing the second aspect, The various methods of the fourth, sixth, eighth, or tenth aspects.
  • the process of sending and receiving the above-mentioned information in the above-mentioned methods can be understood as the process of outputting the above-mentioned information by the processor, and the process of receiving the above-mentioned information input by the processor.
  • the processor when outputting the above-mentioned information, the processor outputs the above-mentioned information to the transceiver for transmission by the transceiver.
  • the transceiver receives the above-mentioned information and inputs it into the processor. Furthermore, after the transceiver receives the above-mentioned information, the above-mentioned information may need to perform other processing before being input to the processor.
  • receiving a trigger frame mentioned in the foregoing method can be understood as the processor inputting a trigger frame.
  • sending a trigger frame may be understood as the processor outputting a trigger frame.
  • the operations of transmitting, sending and receiving involved in the processor can be understood more generally as
  • the processor outputs and receives, inputs, etc. operations, rather than the transmit, transmit, and receive operations directly performed by the radio frequency circuit and antenna.
  • the above-mentioned processor may be a processor specially used to execute these methods, or may be a processor that executes computer instructions in a memory to execute these methods, such as a general-purpose processor.
  • the above-mentioned memory can be a non-transitory (non-transitory) memory, such as a read-only memory (read only memory, ROM), which can be integrated with the processor on the same chip, or can be set on different chips respectively.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing computer software instructions used by the above-mentioned data transmission device, which includes the first aspect, the third aspect, and the fifth aspect for executing the above-mentioned method , the program involved in the seventh aspect, or the ninth aspect, or the program involved in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the sixth aspect, the eighth aspect, or the tenth aspect for performing the above method.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product comprising instructions that, when run on a computer, cause the computer to perform the above-mentioned first, third, fifth, seventh, or ninth aspects The method described in the aspect, or causing the computer to execute the method described in the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the sixth aspect, the eighth aspect, or the tenth aspect.
  • the present application provides a chip system
  • the chip system includes a processor and an interface for supporting a data transmission device to implement the first aspect, the third aspect, the fifth aspect, the seventh aspect, or the ninth aspect
  • the functions involved for example, determine or process at least one of the data and information involved in the above methods, such as trigger frames.
  • the chip system further includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the site.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the present application provides a chip system
  • the chip system includes a processor and an interface for supporting a data transmission device to implement the second aspect, the fourth aspect, the sixth aspect, the eighth aspect, or the tenth aspect
  • the functions involved for example, determine or process at least one of the data and information involved in the above methods.
  • the chip system further includes a memory for storing necessary program instructions and data of the site.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network structure provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 2a is a schematic diagram of a 160 MHz channel distribution provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 2b is a schematic diagram of a channel distribution of 320 MHz provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of subcarrier distribution in an 80 MHz neutron provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a trigger frame-based uplink transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a frame structure of a trigger frame provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 110 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a (52+26)-tone RU in 20 MHz provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a (106+26)-tone RU in 20MHz provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a (484+242)-tone RU in 80 MHz provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 10 is a schematic diagram of (996+484)-tone in 160 MHz provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 11 is a schematic diagram of (2*996+484)-tone RU in 240MHz provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a 3*996-tone RU in 320MHz provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of (3*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a (484+242)-tone RU in 80 MHz provided by an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 120 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 210 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 220 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 310 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 410 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus 500 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of another communication apparatus 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic structural diagram of a chip provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network structure provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the network structure may include one or more access point (access point, AP) type sites and one or more non-access point type sites ( none access point station, non-AP STA).
  • access point access point
  • non-AP STA non-access point type sites
  • the access point type station is referred to as an access point (AP) herein
  • the non-access point type station is referred to as a station (STA).
  • FIG. 1 takes the network structure including one AP and two stations (STA 1, STA 2) as an example for description.
  • the access point can be the access point for terminal equipment (such as mobile phone) to enter the wired (or wireless) network. It is mainly deployed in homes, buildings and campuses, with a typical coverage radius ranging from tens of meters to hundreds of meters. Can be deployed outdoors.
  • the access point is equivalent to a bridge connecting the wired network and the wireless network.
  • the main function is to connect the various wireless network clients together, and then connect the wireless network to the Ethernet.
  • the access point may be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a router) with a wireless fidelity (wreless-fidelity, WiFi) chip.
  • the access point can be a device supporting the 802.11be standard.
  • the access point may also be a device that supports multiple wireless local area networks (WLAN) standards of the 802.11 family, such as 802.11be, 802.11ax, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, and 802.11a.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • the access point in this application may be a high efficient (HE) AP or an extremely high throughput (extramely high throughput, EHT) AP, and may also be an access point applicable to a future generation WiFi standard.
  • HE high efficient
  • EHT extremely high throughput
  • the station may be a wireless communication chip, a wireless sensor or a wireless communication terminal, etc., and may also be called a user.
  • a site can be a mobile phone that supports WiFi communication, a tablet that supports WiFi communication, a set-top box that supports WiFi communication, a smart TV that supports WiFi communication, a smart wearable device that supports WiFi communication, or a smart wearable that supports WiFi communication. Vehicle communication equipment and computers that support WiFi communication functions, etc.
  • the site can support the 802.11be standard.
  • the station can also support multiple wireless local area networks (WLAN) systems of the 802.11 family, such as 802.11be, 802.11ax, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, and 802.11a.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • the access point in this application may be a high efficient (HE) STA or an extremely high throughput (extramely high throughput, EHT) STA, and may also be a STA applicable to a future generation WiFi standard.
  • HE high efficient
  • EHT extremely high throughput
  • access points and sites can be devices used in the Internet of Vehicles, IoT nodes, sensors, etc. in the Internet of Things (IoT), smart cameras in smart homes, smart remote controls, smart water meters, and electricity meters. And sensors in smart cities, etc.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • 802.11n can also be called high throughput (HT)
  • 802.11ac can also be called very high throughput (VHT)
  • 802.11ax can also be called high efficiency ( high efficient, HE)
  • 802.11be can also be called extremely high throughput (EHT)
  • 802.11b adopts a non-OFDM (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing, orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) mode.
  • WLAN starts from 802.11a/g, goes through 802.11n, 802.11ac, and is now 802.11ax and 802.11be under discussion.
  • Table 1 shows the allowed transmission bandwidth and space-time streams.
  • Table 1 The maximum bandwidth and maximum transmission rate of each standard of WLAN
  • the bandwidth can be divided into multiple sub-channels, as shown in FIG. 2a, which is a schematic diagram of channel distribution provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2a when the bandwidth is 160 MHz, it can be divided into main channels. 20MHz channel (or simply primary channel, Primary 20MHz, P20), secondary 20MHz channel (Secondary 20MHz, S20), secondary 40MHz channel (Secondary 40MHz, S40), secondary 80MHz (Secondary 80MHz, S80) channel.
  • channel 1 may correspond to a master 20MHz channel
  • channel 2 may correspond to a slave 20MHz channel
  • channels 3 and 4 may be combined into a slave 40MHz channel
  • channels 5 to 8 may be combined into a slave 80MHz channel.
  • the main 40MHz channel (or simply the main channel, Primary40MHz, P40) is the 40MHz channel where the main 20MHz channel is located
  • the main 80MHz channel (or simply the main channel, Primary80MHz, P80) is the 80MHz channel where the main 20MHz channel is located.
  • FIG. 2b is another schematic diagram of channel distribution provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the bandwidth when the bandwidth is 320MHz, it can be divided into a main 20MHz channel (or abbreviated as a main channel, Primary 20MHz, P20), from 20MHz Channel (Secondary 20MHz, S20), from 40MHz channel (Secondary 40MHz, S40), from 80MHz (Secondary 80MHz, S80) channel, from 160MHz (Secondary160MHz, S160) channel.
  • channel 1 may correspond to the main 20MHz channel
  • channel 2 may correspond to the slave 20MHz channel
  • channel 3 and channel 4 may be combined into a slave 40MHz channel
  • channel 5 to channel 8 may be combined into a slave 80MHz channel
  • the main 40MHz channel (or simply the main channel, Primary 40MHz, P40) is the 40MHz channel where the main 20MHz channel is located
  • the main 80MHz channel (or simply the main channel, Primary 80MHz, P80) is the 80MHz channel where the main 20MHz channel is located
  • the main 160MHz channel The channel (or simply the primary channel, Primary 160MHz, P160) is the 160MHz channel where the primary 20MHz channel is located.
  • the bandwidth may be divided into resource units (RUs) of different sizes.
  • Resource elements of different sizes may be combined into different numbers of subcarriers.
  • a resource unit comprising (or sized) 996 subcarriers referred to as 996-tone RU for short
  • a resource unit comprising (or sized to) 484 subcarriers referred to as 484-tone RU for short
  • comprising (or having a size of ) A resource unit of 484 subcarriers (referred to as 484-tone RU)
  • a resource unit including (or a size of) 106 subcarriers referred to as a 106-tone RU
  • a resource unit including (or a size of) 26 subcarriers referred to as is 26-tone RU
  • a resource unit including (or having a size of) 52 subcarriers referred to as 52-tone RU
  • a resource unit including (or having a size of) 2*996 subcarriers referred to as 2*996 sub
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of subcarrier distribution in an 80 MHz neutron provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the first row indicates that 80MHz can include 36 26-tone RUs
  • the second row indicates that 80MHz can include 16 52-tone RUs
  • the third row indicates that 80MHz can include 8 106-tone RUs
  • the fourth row indicates that 80MHz can include 8 106-tone RUs.
  • the row indicates that 80MHz can include four 242-tone RUs
  • the fifth row indicates that 80MHz can include two 484-tone RUs, where 484L indicates the left half of a 484-tone RU, 484R indicates the right half of a 484-tone RU, and two Each includes 242 sub-carriers, which is another schematic diagram of 484-tone RU.
  • the sixth row indicates that 80MHz can include 1 996-tone RU.
  • some guard subcarriers, null subcarriers, or direct current (DC) subcarriers may also be included, as shown in FIG. 3 .
  • a bandwidth of 160MHz or a 160MHz bandwidth composed of discrete 80MHz+80MHz it can be regarded as a duplicated combination of two 80MHz subcarrier distributions shown in Figure 3.
  • the entire bandwidth can include a 2*996-tone RU, or can include Various combinations of 26-tone RU, 52-tone RU, 106-tone RU, 242-tone RU, 484-tone RU, 996-tone RU.
  • the entire bandwidth can be regarded as a replicated combination of three 80MHz subcarrier distributions shown in Figure 3, or can include 26-tone RU, 52-tone RU, 106 -Various combinations of tone RU, 242-tone RU, 484-tone RU, 996-tone RU.
  • the entire bandwidth can be regarded as a duplicated combination of four 80MHz subcarrier distributions shown in Figure 3, or can include 26-tone RU, 52-tone RU, 106 -Various combinations of tone RU, 242-tone RU, 484-tone RU, 996-tone RU.
  • the subcarrier distributions of the above various bandwidths increase in frequency from left to right.
  • the left side shown in Figure 3 can be regarded as the lowest frequency, and the right side shown in Figure 3 can be regarded as the highest frequency.
  • Resource units are numbered from left to right, such as first (1st), second (2nd), ..., etc.
  • the four 242-tone RUs included in 80MHz can be labeled from left to right: the first 242-tone RU, the second 242-tone RU, the third 242-tone RU, the third Four 242-tone RUs.
  • the first 242-tone RU and the second 242-tone RU correspond to the two 20MHz with the lowest frequency within the 80MHz, from low to high frequency; the third 242-tone RU, the fourth The 242-tone RU corresponds to the two 20MHz with the highest frequency within the 80MHz, from low to high frequency. Since there is an intermediate 26-tone RU every 80MHz, the above-mentioned 242-tone RU and its corresponding 20MHz are not completely coincident in frequency.
  • 802.11be also introduces a multi-resource unit (multi-RU, MRU) obtained by combining multiple RUs of the above-mentioned sizes.
  • multi-RU multi-resource unit
  • 802.11be also introduced (52+26)-tone RU (or (52+26)-tone MRU for short, or 78-tone RU for short) that includes a 52-tone RU and a 26-tone RU, (106+26)-tone RU (or (106+26)-tone MRU for short, or 132-tone RU for short) including a 106-tone RU and a 26-tone RU; includes a 484-tone RU and A 242-tone RU of (484+242)-tone RU (or (484+242)-tone MRU for short, or 726-tone RU for short), including a 996-tone RU and a 484-tone RU ( 996+484)-tone RU (or (996+484)-tone MRU for short, or
  • 26-tone RU approximately corresponds to 2MHz
  • 52-tone RU approximately corresponds to 4MHz
  • 106-tone RU approximately corresponds to 8MHz
  • 242-tone RU roughly corresponds to 20MHz. The sizes of other RUs can be added or multiplied accordingly, which will not be repeated here.
  • the access point allocates multiple RUs to the station, which may be referred to as station allocation MRU.
  • the MRU includes multiple RUs, or multiple resource units combined, or multiple resource units combined, or combined by multiple resource units.
  • “combined”, “combined” and “combined by” represent the same meaning.
  • an MRU composed of multiple RUs may also include partial DC sub-carriers, null sub-carriers, and the like.
  • the STA obtains the transmission right through channel competition and then performs uplink data transmission, such as channel grabbing based on EDCA (enhanced distributed channel access, enhanced distributed channel access).
  • 802.11ax introduces a scheduled uplink transmission method based on trigger frames.
  • a schematic diagram of a trigger frame-based scheduled uplink transmission is shown in FIG. 4 , which is a schematic diagram of a trigger frame-based uplink transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the access point sends a trigger frame, and the trigger frame contains resource scheduling and other parameters for one or more stations to send uplink sub-physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU); after the station receives the trigger frame, It parses out the user information field that matches (or is the same as) its own association identifier, and then sends an efficient trigger-based data packet on a RU or MRU indicated by the resource unit allocation subfield in the user information field.
  • HE TB PPDU physical layer protocol data unit
  • the acknowledgment frame sent by the access point to one or more stations may be sent in the form of downlink OFDMA, or may be sent in the form of non-HT replication transmission.
  • the acknowledgment frame includes an acknowledgment (Ack) frame and a block acknowledgment (Block Ack) frame.
  • the Block Ack frame includes a compressed Block Ack frame and a Multi-STA Block Ack frame.
  • the Ack frame and Block Ack frame are the confirmation of the uplink sub-PPDU sent by one station
  • the Multi-STA Block Ack is the confirmation of the uplink sub-PPDU sent by one or more stations.
  • the frame format of the trigger frame may be as shown in FIG. 5 , which is a schematic structural diagram of a trigger frame provided by an embodiment of the present application, and the trigger frame may only include some of the fields shown in FIG. 5 , Or the trigger frame may include more fields than those shown in FIG. 5 , which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the trigger frame includes a common info field and a user info list field.
  • the trigger frame may further include a frame control (frame control) field, a duration (duration) field, a receiving address (RA) field, a transmitting address (TA) field, a padding (padding) field and a frame check sequence (FCS, frame check sequence). ) fields, etc.
  • the public information field may also be referred to as a public domain or a public information domain.
  • the common information field includes a trigger frame type (trigger type) subfield, a length (length) subfield, a cascade indication (cascade indication) subfield, a carrier sense required (CS Required) subfield, a bandwidth (bandwidth) subfield, Guard interval + long training sequence (GI+LTF) subfield, trigger frame type-based common information (trigger dependent common info) subfield and other common information that all stations need to read.
  • the user information list field may also be referred to as a user information list field, a site-by-site field, or the like.
  • the user information list field includes one or more user information (user info) fields, and each user information field includes information that each site needs to read, such as association identifier (Association Identifier, AID) subfield, resource unit allocation (RU allocation) ) subfield and coding type (coding type) subfield, modulation and coding strategy (Modulation and Coding Scheme, MCS) subfield, reserved (reserved) subfield, trigger frame type-based user information (trigger dependent user info) subfield Wait.
  • association identifier Association Identifier
  • RU allocation resource unit allocation
  • coding type coding type subfield
  • MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme
  • the associated identifier field is used to indicate the associated identifier of the site corresponding to the user information field; the resource unit allocation subfield is used to indicate the RU/MRU (or the location of the RU/MRU) allocated for the site.
  • field described herein may also be referred to as “field”, “information”, etc., and the "subfield” may be referred to as “subfield”, “information” and the like.
  • the PPDU sent by the station on the assigned RU/MRU can also be an Extremely High Throughput trigger based physical layer protocol data unit (EHT TB PPDU).
  • EHT TB PPDU Extremely High Throughput trigger based physical layer protocol data unit
  • Table 2 The functions of each field of the PPDU are shown in Table 2. It should be understood that this is only an example, and in standard formulation or actual implementation, the EHT PPDU may also include other fields.
  • the present application provides a resource unit indication method.
  • an access point can allocate MRUs to stations respectively.
  • the resource unit indication method may also be referred to as a multi-resource unit indication method or a multi-resource unit combining method or the like.
  • This embodiment of the present application uses a trigger frame to allocate MRUs to a station, and designs resource unit allocation subfields in the trigger frame to meet RU/MRU allocation in 320 MHz.
  • the trigger frame designed in the embodiment of the present application is suitable for 802.11be (EHT) and future WiFi systems, where the uplink transmission bandwidth is large and the types of uplink transmission resource blocks allocated to the station increase.
  • EHT 802.11be
  • future WiFi systems where the uplink transmission bandwidth is large and the types of uplink transmission resource blocks allocated to the station increase.
  • each site corresponds to a resource unit allocation subfield.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield is divided into two parts, the bits in the first part are used to inform the station of a certain frequency band range, and the bits in the second part are used to inform the MRU entry based on the frequency band range.
  • the entry is the index in the index table or the RU and MRU corresponding to the index, and the bits in the second part can indicate the RU and MRU in the index table.
  • the bits of the first part may be called frequency band range indication
  • the bits of the second part may be called resource unit indication.
  • the frequency range where one RU in the MRU referred to in the embodiments of the present application is located may be different from or the same as the frequency range actually covered by the RU.
  • the frequency range in which the RU is shortened in this embodiment may be larger or smaller than the frequency range actually covered by the RU, or the two may be the same.
  • the actual coverage frequency range of the RU is smaller than the occupied frequency range.
  • a RU with a size of 484-tone actually covers a frequency range of 40MHz.
  • the 40MHz is the second 80MHz in the 320MHz, and the granularity is 80MHz.
  • the frequency range where the RU is located can be called the frequency range where the 484-tone RU is located is the second 80MHz within 320MHz;
  • the actual frequency range covered by the RU is the same or equal to the frequency range occupied.
  • a RU with a size of 484-tone covers a real frequency range of 40MHz, and the 40MHz is the third 40MHz in the 320MHz, with 40MHz as the granularity
  • the frequency range where the 484-tone RU is located is the third 40MHz within 320MHz;
  • the actual frequency range covered by the RU is the same as or equal to the frequency range occupied.
  • the actual frequency range covered by the RU is 80MHz.
  • the 80MHz is the second 80MHz in the 320MHz, and 80MHz is When the granularity describes the frequency range where the RU is located, it can be said that the frequency range where the 996-tone RU is located is the second 80MHz within 320MHz;
  • the actual frequency range covered by the RU is larger than the occupied frequency range.
  • a RU with a size of 996-tone covers an actual frequency range of 80MHz.
  • the 80MHz is the second 80MHz in the 320MHz, and the granularity is 40MHz.
  • the frequency range where the RU is located it can be said that the frequency range where the 996-tone RU is located is the third (or fourth) 40MHz within 320MHz.
  • the relationship between the frequency band range indication and the frequency band range may include the relationship described in any of the following aspects:
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located.
  • the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRUs allocated to the station
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest RU in the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located
  • the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRUs allocated to the station, and the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where one RU in the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located;
  • the unit indicates that the allocated MRU is determined.
  • One RU in the MRU may be the smallest RU in the MRU as described above, or the largest RU in the MRU, or a RU of a preset size in the MRU. The following embodiments take the smallest RU as an example for description.
  • the frequency band range indication can not only indicate a frequency band range, but the frequency band range is the frequency band range where one RU in the MRU is located, so that the resource unit indication can indicate more MRU entries in the case of the same number of bits, Or it is beneficial for the resource unit to indicate that when the same number of MRU entries needs to be indicated, fewer indexes are required, and more indexes can be reserved to indicate other information.
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the granularity of the frequency band range in which one RU in the indicated MRUs is located, which may be 40MHz, 80MHz, 160MHz, 240MHz or 320MHz. That is, in an embodiment, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 80 MHz where one RU in the MRUs is located. In another embodiment, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 40MHz where one RU in the MRUs is located. In another embodiment, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 160 MHz where one RU in the MRUs is located. In another embodiment, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 240 MHz where one RU in the MRUs is located. In another embodiment, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 320 MHz where one RU in the MRUs is located.
  • the resource unit indication method 110 is described by taking the frequency band range indication for indicating the 80MHz where one RU in the MRU is located as an example; the resource unit indication method 120 is described by taking the frequency band range indication being used to indicate the 40MHz where one RU in the MRU is located.
  • the granularity of other frequency bands is not described again to avoid redundancy, but related embodiments can be obtained by those skilled in the art based on this implementation manner, the resource unit indication method 110 and the resource unit indication method 120 .
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band range in the bandwidth that is not related to the MRU.
  • the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRUs allocated to the station, and the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where some or all of the resource units RUs in the bandwidth other than the MRU are located;
  • the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication determine the allocated MRU.
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band range in the bandwidth;
  • the resource unit indication is used to indicate the MRU allocated to the station, and the MRU includes the remaining resource elements in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication RU; the station determines the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the frequency band range indication not only indicates a frequency band range, but also the frequency band range is a frequency band range that is not related to the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication, so that it is helpful for the station to know the frequency band range related to the MRU in the bandwidth, which is also beneficial to the resource
  • the unit indicates that more MRU entries can be indicated in the case of the same number of bits, or it is beneficial for the resource unit to indicate that when the same number of MRU entries needs to be indicated, the required number of indexes is less, and more indexes can be reserved so as to to indicate other information.
  • the resource unit indication method 210 is described by taking "the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where some or all of the resource units RUs in the bandwidth other than the MRU are located" as an example; the resource unit indication method 220 is described by “the MRU includes the bandwidth The remaining resource units RU" except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication are taken as an example to illustrate.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is variable, which is related to the type of MRU indicated by the resource unit indication.
  • the granularity of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is related to the MRU indicated by the resource element indication.
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located, so the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is variable, not the fixed granularity of the frequency band range as described in the first aspect above.
  • the frequency band range indication can indicate the frequency band range where the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located, which is helpful for the station to know the frequency band range where the MRU is located in the bandwidth. More MRU entries are indicated, or it is beneficial for the resource unit to indicate that when the same number of MRU entries needs to be indicated, fewer indexes are required, and more indexes can be reserved for indicating other information.
  • the resource unit indication method 310 is described by taking "the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located" as an example.
  • the station when the station receives the corresponding resource unit allocation subfield, it can obtain the MRU by reading the bits of the first part and the bits of the second part, such as the location of the MRU and other information. .
  • the present application also provides the resource unit indication method of the fourth aspect.
  • the bits of the first part and the bits of the second part can be combined into one part for indication.
  • the resource unit The allocation subfield is indicated by the whole bit, and the first part of the bits used to indicate the frequency range and the second part of the bits used to indicate the resource unit are no longer distinguished.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield corresponding to the station occupies N bits, and an index indicated by the N bits directly represents the absolute position of an RU or a multi-resource unit MRU in the bandwidth, and then the station can Index, directly look up the table to know the allocated RU/MRU. Therefore, in this application, the resource unit indication method 401 is explained by taking "an index indicated by the N bits directly represents the absolute position of one RU or a multi-resource unit MRU in the bandwidth" as an example.
  • the resource unit indication method 110 , the resource unit indication method 120 , the resource unit indication method 210 , the resource unit indication method 220 , the resource unit indication method 310 , and the resource unit indication method 410 are described below with reference to the accompanying drawings.
  • Embodiment 1 mainly describes the resource unit indication method 110 .
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 110 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 6, the resource unit indication method 110 may include but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the access point determines the trigger frame
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRU allocated to the corresponding station, the frequency band The range indication is used to indicate the 80MHz where the smallest resource unit RU among the MRUs indicated by the resource unit indication is located.
  • the access point sends a trigger frame
  • the station receives the trigger frame from the access point
  • the station determines the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the station determines the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication, including: the station determines the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication (that is, the frequency band range indication can indicate the size of the frequency band range. is 80MHz and the position in the bandwidth), it can be known that the smallest RU in the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is in the 80MHz, and then the allocated MRU can be obtained in combination with the index indicated by the resource unit.
  • the frequency band range indication that is, the frequency band range indication can indicate the size of the frequency band range. is 80MHz and the position in the bandwidth
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (52+26)-tone RU, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 80MHz where the 26-tone RU in the (52+26)-tone RU is located;
  • the indicated MRU is (106+26)-tone RU, the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is (106+26)-tone RU in the 80MHz where the 26-tone RU is located; or the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (484 +242)-tone RU, the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is (484+242)-tone RU in the 80MHz where the 242-tone RU is located; or the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (996+484)-tone RU , the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 80MHz where the 484-tone RU in the (996+484)-tone RU is located; or the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (2*996+484)-tone RU, the frequency band range indication
  • the resource unit allocation subfield has 9 bits, and the frequency band range indicates that the first and second bits in the resource unit allocation subfield are denoted as B0 and B1.
  • B0, B1 indicate an 80MHz of the 320MHz.
  • Table 3 is each 80MHz that needs to be indicated by the frequency band range indication (B0, B1) to indicate the 80MHz where the smallest RU is located among the MRUs indicated by the resource unit indication.
  • each 80MHz frequency band range in the 320MHz is called the first 80MHz, the second 80MHz, the third 80MHz, and the fourth 80MHz in order of frequency from low to high.
  • B0B1 is 00, indicating that the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the first 80MHz in 320MHz; B0B1 is 01, indicating that the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the second 80MHz in 320MHz; B0B1 is 10, indicating that the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the third 80MHz in 320MHz; B0B1 is 11, indicating that the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the fourth 80MHz in 320MHz.
  • the resource unit indicates that the resource unit is allocated the third to ninth bits in the subfield, denoted as B2 to B8. Then, in combination with the frequency band range indication and each RU or MRU to be indicated, the resource unit indicates the RU or MRU to be indicated as shown in Table 4.
  • the first column in Table 4 is the value of B2 to B8, which can be called the index indicated by the resource unit indication; the second column in Table 4 represents the size of the resource unit corresponding to each index; the third column in Table 4 represents each resource unit The number of indexes corresponding to the size, that is, the number of entries. Wherein, each index in Table 4 can be combined with the frequency band range indication to determine the corresponding RU or MRU.
  • a 26-tone RU in 80MHz has 36 positions, and the resource unit indication is based on the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, by indicating one of the indices 0 to 35 shown in Table 4 to indicate the corresponding A 26-tone RU in that 80MHz.
  • index 36 in Table 4 can be reserved instead of indicating 52-tone RUs, that is, index 37 can be used to indicate other RUs/MRUs.
  • a device that is beneficial to 802.11ax can continue to read the relevant entries in Table 4 described in the embodiments of the present application, so that the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application are compatible with existing standards.
  • the 52-tone RU in 80MHz has 16 positions, and the resource unit indication is based on the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, by indicating an index among the indexes 36 to 51 shown in Table 4, to Indicates a 52-tone RU in the corresponding 80MHz.
  • the 106-tone RU in 80MHz has 8 positions, and the resource unit indication is based on the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, by indicating an index among the indexes 52 to 59 shown in Table 4, to Indicates a 52-tone RU in the corresponding 80MHz.
  • the 242-tone RU in 80MHz has 4 locations, and the resource unit indication is based on the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, by indicating an index among the indexes 60 to 63 shown in Table 4, to Indicates a 242-tone RU in the corresponding 80MHz.
  • the 484-tone RU in 80MHz has 2 positions, and the resource unit indication is based on the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, by indicating an index among the indexes 64 to 65 shown in Table 4, to Indicates a 484-tone RU in the corresponding 80MHz.
  • the frequency band range indication can indicate the 80MHz where the 996-tone RU is located, so the resource unit indication only needs one index 66 to indicate the 996-tone RU.
  • the station determines the 80MHz where the smallest RU in the MRU is located according to the frequency band range indication, and the RU size corresponding to the index 66 indicated by the resource unit indication is 996-tone RU, so the station can know that the 996-tone RU corresponding to the 80MHz is Allocated RU.
  • the MRU includes RUs filled with vertical lines. That is, RUs filled with vertical lines represent RUs included in the MRU.
  • the (26+52)-tone RUs shown in Figure 7 include the vertical line-filled second 26-tone RU and the vertical line-filled The second 52-tone RU.
  • "*" and "x" have the same meaning and are not distinguished.
  • 2*996-tone RU can be represented as 2 ⁇ 996-tone RU.
  • the frequency band range indication can indicate a 996-
  • the position of another 996-tone RU in the 2*996-tone RU can be known at the 80MHz where the tone RU is located. Therefore, the resource unit indication only needs one index 67 to indicate the 2*996-tone RU in combination with the frequency band range indication.
  • the station determines the 80MHz where the smallest RU in the MRU is located according to the frequency band range indication, and then combines the index indicated by the resource unit indication. For example, the RU size corresponding to 67 is 2*996-tone RU, so the station can know the 80MHz where the main RU is located. 160MHz or from 160MHz is allocated 2*996-tone RU.
  • the resource unit indication can indicate an index of 68, which can make the station know that the allocated RU is 4*996-tone RU.
  • the (52+26)-tone RU in 20MHz has three combinations as shown in Figure 7, namely: (52+26)-tone including the second 52-tone RU and the second 26-tone RU in 20MHz RUs, including (52+26)-tone RUs for the second 52-tone RU and fifth 26-tone RU in 20MHz, including (52+26)-tone RUs for the third 52-tone RU and the eighth 26-tone RU 26)-tone RU. Since (52+26)-tone RUs cannot be combined across 20MHz, there are 12 (ie 4*3) combinations of (52+26)-tone RUs in 80MHz.
  • the resource unit indication also needs to indicate one of the indexes 69 to 80 to indicate the corresponding one of the 80MHz (52+26) -tone RU.
  • the corresponding relationship between each index in index 69 to index 80 and each of the 12 kinds of (52+26)-tone RUs (52+26)-tone RU can be determined according to the size of the index to the 12 kinds of (52+26)
  • the starting frequencies of -tone RUs are sorted one-to-one from low to high.
  • the (106+26)-tone RU in 20MHz has two combinations as shown in Figure 8, namely: (106+26)-tone including the first 106-tone RU and the fifth 26-tone RU in 20MHz RU, including (106+26)-tone RU of the second 106-tone RU and the fifth 26-tone RU in 20MHz. Therefore, (106+26)-tone RU in 80MHz has 8 (ie 4*2) combinations. Therefore, on the basis of the 80MHz where the 26-tone RU indicated by the frequency band range indication is located, the resource unit indication also needs to indicate one of the indexes 81 to 88 to indicate the corresponding one of the 80MHz (106+26) -tone RU.
  • each index in index 81 to index 88 and each of (106+26)-tone RU among the 8 kinds of (106+26)-tone RUs can be calculated according to the size of the index.
  • 26)-tone RU's starting frequencies are sorted one-to-one from low to high.
  • the (484+242)-tone RU in 80MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 9, namely: (484+242)-tone including the second 484-tone RU and the first 242-tone RU in 80MHz RU, including the (484+242)-tone RU of the second 484-tone RU and the second 242-tone RU in 80MHz, including the first 484-tone RU and the third 242-tone RU in 80MHz ( 484+242)-tone RU, including (484+242)-tone RU of the first 484-tone RU and the fourth 242-tone RU in 80MHz.
  • the resource unit indication also needs to indicate one of the indexes 89 to 92 to indicate the corresponding one of the 80MHz (484+242) -tone RU.
  • the corresponding relationship between each index in index 89 to index 92 and each of the four (484+242)-tone RUs in the four (484+242)-tone RUs can be determined according to the size of the index. 242)-tone RU's starting frequencies are sorted one-to-one from low to high.
  • the (996+484)-tone RU in 160MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 10, namely: including the first 484 in 160MHz -tone RU and second 996-tone RU(996+484)-tone RU, including second 484-tone RU and second 996-tone RU(996+484)-tone RU, including 160MHz
  • the third 484-tone RU and the first 996-tone RU(996+484)-tone RU including the fourth 484-tone RU and the first 996-tone RU(996+484)-tone RU in 160MHz .
  • the station can directly know the location of the 996-tone RU in the (996+484)-tone RU, so the resource unit indication also needs to indicate the index 93 to one of the indices 94 to indicate the position of the 484-tone RU in the (996+484)-tone RU in this 80MHz.
  • the 484-tone RU has two locations in the 80MHz, so the resource element indication corresponds to two entries.
  • the frequency band range indication may indicate the 80MHz where the 484-tone RU in the (996+484)-tone RU is located, and the resource element indication may indicate index 93 or index 94.
  • the station receives the resource unit allocation subfield, it can be determined to be allocated according to the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, combined with the position of the 484-tone RU in the 80MHz corresponding to the index value indicated by the resource unit indication.
  • the (996+484)-tone RU may indicate the 80MHz where the 484-tone RU in the (996+484)-tone RU is located, and the resource element indication may indicate index 93 or index 94.
  • index 93 corresponds to the first 484-tone RU in 80MHz indicated by the frequency range indication
  • index 94 corresponds to the second 484-tone RU in 80MHz indicated by the frequency range indication
  • the 160MHz is the main 160MHz in the 320MHz.
  • the frequency range indication is 00, and the resource unit indication is 93; in Figure 10 In the resource unit allocation subfield corresponding to the second (996+484)-tone RU in the first row, the frequency range indication is 00, and the resource unit indication is 94; the first (996+484)- In the resource unit allocation subfield corresponding to tone RU, the frequency range indication is 01, and the resource unit indication is 93; in the resource unit allocation subfield corresponding to the second (996+484)-tone RU in the second row in Fig. The range indication is 01 and the resource unit indication is 94.
  • (2*996+484)-tone RU belongs to 240MHz transmission, it can only exist in 240MHz formed by punching the 80MHz with the lowest or highest frequency in 320MHz.
  • (2*996+484)-tone RU has The six combinations shown in 11 are: (2*996+484)-tone RU including the first 484-tone RU and the second and third 996-tone RU in 240MHz, including the second in 240MHz (2*996+484)-tone RU of one 484-tone RU and the second and third 996-tone RU, including the third 484-tone RU and the first and third 996-tone RU in 240MHz (2*996+484)-tone RU of RU, including the fourth 484-tone RU in 240MHz and (2*996+484)-tone RU of the first and third 996-tone RU, including in 240MHz (2*996+484)-tone RU of the fifth 484-tone RU and the first and second 996-tone RU
  • the resource unit indication also needs to indicate index 95 to index 98 to indicate the corresponding (2*996+484) - the location of the tone RU.
  • the 484-tone RU in the (2*996+484)-tone RU is located.
  • the resource unit indication also needs to indicate index 95 to index 100 to indicate the corresponding (2*996+484) - the location of tone RU.
  • the resource unit indication also needs to indicate the index 99 to one of index 101 to indicate the position of one of the remaining two 996-tone RUs in 320MHz combined with this 80MHz.
  • the corresponding relationship between each index in index 99 to index 101 and one of the three options of the remaining two 996-tone RUs can be determined according to the size of the index, starting from the three (3*996)-tone RUs
  • the initial frequencies are sorted one-to-one from low to high.
  • the size of the MRU indicated by the resource element indication is (3*996)-tone RU, and the size of the indicated index, and the starting frequency of the optional combination of the resource element indication (3*996)-tone RU Sort from low to high one-to-one correspondence.
  • the access point allocates the (3*996)-tone RU as shown in the first row of Figure 12 to the site, it can be seen from Table 3 that the B0B1 corresponding to the site needs to be set to 01;
  • the index 99 corresponds to the (3*996)-tone RU shown in the third row in Figure 12
  • the index 100 corresponds to the (3*996)-tone RU shown in the second row in Figure 12
  • the index 101 corresponds to the first one in Figure 12.
  • B2 to B8 need to be set to 101; further, the site knows that the RU size corresponding to the index indicated by B2 to B8 is (3*996)-tone RU, and B2 to B8 The index of B8 is 101, and B0B1 indicates that one 996-tone RU in this (3*996)-tone RU is the second 996-tone RU in 320MHz, so that the station can know the allocated (3*996)-tone RU is the (3*996)-tone RU shown in the first row of Figure 12.
  • the (3*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz has eight combinations as shown in Figure 13, which are: one 484-tone RU among the eight 484-tone RUs in 320MHz and the 80MHz where the 484-tone RU is located. A combination of the remaining three 996-tone RUs. Therefore, on the basis of the 80MHz where the 484-tone RU indicated by the frequency band range indication is located, there is only one choice for the remaining three 996-tone RUs in 320MHz, but there are two positions for the 484-tone RU in 80MHz, so the resource The unit indication also needs to indicate one of the indexes 102 to 103 to indicate a position of the 484-tone RU in 80MHz.
  • each index in index 102 to index 103 and the two positions of the 484-tone RU in 80MHz can be determined from the starting frequency of the two positions of the 484-tone RU in 80MHz according to the size of the index. Sort low to high one-to-one correspondence.
  • a (484+242)-tone RU in an 80MHz in 160MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 14, so a (996+484+242)-tone RU in 160MHz has eight combinations. Therefore, on the basis of the 80MHz where the 242-tone RU indicated by the band range indication is located, there is only one choice for the 996-tone RU outside the 80MHz in 160MHz, but there are four types of the 242-tone RU in the 80MHz location, Therefore, the resource unit indication also needs to indicate one of the indexes 104 to 107 to indicate a position of the 242-tone RU in 80MHz.
  • each index in index 104 to index 107 and the four positions of the 242-tone RU in 80MHz can be determined from the starting frequency of the four positions of the 242-tone RU in 80MHz according to the size of the index. Sort low to high one-to-one correspondence.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication can also inform the frequency range where the smallest RU in the MRU is located, it is beneficial for the resource unit indication to use fewer indexes to indicate various possible positions of the MRU respectively.
  • the resource unit indication For the eight combinations of (996+484+242)-tone RUs, as shown in Table 4, the resource unit indication only needs four indexes to indicate each combination respectively.
  • the resource unit indication only needs two indexes to indicate each combination respectively.
  • the frequency band range indication in the resource unit indication method 101 can carry more information, that is, the 80MHz where the smallest RU in the MRU is located. For example, if the frequency band range indication only indicates the lowest 80MHz related to the MRU, then for the four combinations of (996+484)-tone RUs shown in Figure 10, the resource element indication requires four indices to indicate each combination respectively; if the frequency band The range indication is used to indicate the 80MHz where the smallest RU in the MRU is located. As shown in Table 4, the resource unit indication only needs two indexes to indicate each combination of (996+484)-tone RUs. Therefore, the frequency band range indication in the resource unit indication method 101 can carry more information, which is beneficial for the resource unit indication to use fewer indexes to respectively indicate various possible positions of the MRU.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a technical solution, which relates to another design of a resource unit allocation subfield (RU Allocation subfield) in a user information field (User Info field) in a trigger frame (Trigger frame).
  • RU Allocation subfield adopts a 9-bit design, which is specifically implemented in the form of 7-bit resource unit indication + 2-bit frequency band range indication, where 2 bits are frequency band range indication, which is used to indicate a certain 80MHz position, the other 7-bit resource element indication is used to indicate that 2 bits determine the specific position of the RU/MRU in a certain 80MHz case.
  • the 2 bits shown in Table 3 are used to indicate a certain 80MHz position in absolute frequency, wherein 00 indicates the lowest frequency 80MHz, 01 indicates the second lowest frequency 80MHz, 10 indicates the second highest frequency 80MHz, and 11 indicates the highest frequency 80MHz.
  • a 7-bit + 2-bit mode is proposed. , where 2 bits use the master-slave position indication method, where 2 bits indicate the position in 80MHz where a smallest RU in the RU/MRU is located.
  • the RU Allocation subfield can have the following specific designs:
  • the two bits under the master-slave indication method are represented by BS and B0 here (may also be represented by other letters, such as B0B1 in the foregoing embodiment, which is only an example here), wherein B can be understood as a bit, and S can be understood as a 160MHz segment.
  • BS here means master 160MHz or slave 160MHz
  • B0 means master and slave 80MHz at P160MHz
  • B0 means lower frequency 80MHz and higher frequency 80MHz at S160MHz.
  • the 2 bits (BSB0) can be indicated in the form of 00 indicating the primary (Primary) 80MHz (P80MHz), 01 indicating the secondary (Secondary) 80MHz (S80MHz), 10 indicating the lower frequency 80MHz among the 160MHz (S160MHz), Also referred to as the third 80MHz, 11 indicates a higher frequency 80MHz from 160MHz (S160MHz), also referred to as the fourth 80MHz.
  • the corresponding relationship between the value of the 2 bits and the meaning is only an example, and in other implementation manners, the corresponding relationship between the value of the 2 bits and the meaning can be interchanged.
  • an 11be device may receive an 11be user information field or an 11ax user information field, which can bring advantages to the identification of the user information field when the master-slave indication is used: such as in the common field part of the trigger frame, We can use a 4-bit bitmap form to indicate that the master 80MHz, the slave 80MHz, the third 80MHz, and the fourth 80MHz belong to HE/EHT (2 bits can also be used to indicate only the master 80MHz and the slave 80MHz).
  • an 11be device can learn which 80MHz all or part of its allocated RUs belong to through the BS and B0 (because the indication method in this embodiment can indicate the 80MHz where the smallest RU in the RU or /MRU is located) , and then through the HE/EHT instruction to know whether the read user information field belongs to the 11ax user information field or the 11be user information field: if the bitmap is 0011, it means that the master and slave 80MHz are the ax user information field, and the slave 160MHz is the be user information field, then The 11be receiver can locate a certain 80MHz through BS and B0.
  • BS and B0 adopt the master-slave 80MHz setting method, which is beneficial to 11be's identification of HE/EHT.
  • the location of the BS is usually set to 0 in the 11ax user field (which can be reserved field B39), and the user information field of 11ax itself is in the main 160MHz, so the BS should also be 0, and the default is the main 160MHz.
  • the B0 position is in the same position in the user information fields of both 11ax and 11be. Therefore, when the 11be device reads a user information field that is unknown to be HE/EHT, the purpose of distinguishing HE/EHT can be achieved by combining the above-mentioned x-bit HE/EHT bitmap with BS and B0.
  • the 11be user information field indicates that the master-slave 80MHz can be BS-B0 equal to 00 or 01, and the 11ax user information field indicates that the master-slave 80MHz is also BS-B0 equal to 00 and 01, so they are compatible with each other.
  • the BS-B0 of the 11be user information field can also indicate 10 and 11, indicating 80MHz from 160MHz.
  • Embodiment (1) 2-bit correspondence table between master-slave indication and absolute indication.
  • This embodiment (1) provides the design of the corresponding relationship in Table 4 (1) below.
  • 2 bits indicate 4 master-slave situations (a, b, c, d) of the position of the master 80MHz in 320MHz, and 2 bits indicate the corresponding relationship of 80MHz at the absolute frequency.
  • the absolute frequency here is the absolute position of a certain 80MHz over the entire 320MHz bandwidth.
  • Case a is consistent with the positional distribution of the absolute frequency, that is, the main 80MHz is on the lowest 80MHz of the absolute frequency, in Case b, the main 80MHz is on the second-lowest 80MHz of the absolute frequency, and in Case c, the main 80MHz is on the second-highest 80MHz of the absolute frequency, In Case d, the main 80MHz is on the highest 80MHz of the absolute frequency.
  • Each row in Table 4(1) represents the value indicated by 80MHz at the absolute frequency corresponding to the four master-slave distributions, such as the first row: 00 of the absolute frequency corresponds to a0, b1, c2, d2 (that is, the value of Case a 00 corresponds to the decision position 00, Case b value 01 corresponds to the absolute position 00, Case c value 10 corresponds to the absolute position 00, Case d value 10 corresponds to the absolute position 00).
  • the values of the two bits and their meanings here are only examples. In the specific implementation, there may be other corresponding relationships, but there is a difference between the master-slave distribution and the value indicated by the absolute frequency of 80MHz. Mapping relations.
  • the receiving end device knows which Case it is, such as Case c, when the received two-bit indication is c3(11), it only needs to correspond c3 to 01 in the absolute position, and then Combined with the 7-bit resource unit indication described in the foregoing embodiment, the final allocated RU/MRU can be known by looking up Table 4. Equivalent to the receiving end device has an operation to convert from relative position to absolute position.
  • the receiver device here can be a non-AP STA.
  • the 2-bit correspondence table 4(1) between the master-slave indication and the absolute frequency indication is as follows:
  • the BS and B0 can indicate the 80MHz where the smallest RU among the MRUs or RUs is located, and the master-slave position indication method is adopted.
  • 3*996 is composed of 2*996+996, which can indicate the 80MHz position where 996 is located; or 3*996+484, which can indicate the 80MHz position where 484 is located.
  • 2 bits can be used in the RU Allocation subfield to indicate a certain 80MHz position, and the indication form can be: 00 indicates the main 80MHz, 01 indicates the slave 80MHz, and 10 indicates the third 80MHz (the lower frequency 80MHz in S160). ), 11 indicates the fourth 80MHz (the higher frequency 80MHz in S160).
  • N is used to represent the order of absolute frequencies corresponding to the 80MHz from low to high when the 2 bits in the RU Allocation subfield indicate a certain 80MHz position: 0, 1, 2, and 3. Among them, 0, 1, 2, and 3 represent the lowest frequency of 80MHz, the second low frequency of 80MHz, the second high frequency of 80MHz, and the highest frequency of 80MHz. N can be used to calculate the actual position of the RU in the frequency domain.
  • Table 4(1) can be equivalently expressed as the following form, in other words, Table 4-A is the equivalent representation form of Table 4(1), It can be obtained without doubt from Table 4(1).
  • table 4-A can also be expressed as the following table 4-B (the two are completely equivalent, only the expression is different, in other words, table 4-B is the equivalent expression of table 4(1) or table 4-A form, which can be unambiguously obtained from Table 4(1) or Table 4-A):
  • the first mode uses the description of the master-slave positions of 80MHz and 160MHz, and the second mode uses the division of a/b/c/d in different situations.
  • BS, B0, X1, and X0 can have the following formula relationship (XOR represents the exclusive OR operation, and the horizontal line on the parameter represents the inversion operation):
  • the first term of the expression on the right is related to X1
  • the second term is related to X0.
  • the transmitting end device indicates a certain 80MHz location through 2 bits (BS B0) in the RU Allocation subfield.
  • the receiving end device obtains the absolute frequency X1 and X0 of a certain 80MHz corresponding to 320MHz through the conversion relationship of the above table or formula, or obtains the absolute frequency of a certain 80MHz corresponding to 320MHz.
  • Order N from low to high.
  • Example (2) Table 4(1) of Example (1) is directly embedded in Table 4(2) below.
  • the 2-bit indication under the master-slave position indication method can be directly integrated into the 9-bit absolute position indication table. That is, the 2-bit 80MHz absolute position value in the original absolute position table can be replaced with the corresponding relative position value. As shown in the table in the embodiment (1), the first row has: the lowest 80MHz (00 under the absolute position) Corresponding to a0, b1, c2, d2, other lines are similar. In this way, the device can directly read Table 4(2) without the need to read the resource unit indication after performing bit value mapping and conversion to finally obtain the allocated RU/MRU.
  • the method for indicating the master-slave position wherein the 2-bit indication may indicate the position in 80MHz where the smallest RU in the RU/MRU is located.
  • the above table 4 (2) can be designed into four tables.
  • Table 4(2) can also be divided into the following four tables: Table 4(2a), Table 4(2b), Table 4(2c), Table 4(2d) , that is, a table containing only case a or case b or case c or case d, a table does not need to involve BS and B0 instructions of other cases.
  • Embodiment (4) 2-bit position indication + 7-bit table indication method
  • the 2-bit BS and B0 indications it can be determined to select MRU1 or MRU3 or MRU5 or MRU7. That is, the idea of the method is that after a RU/MRU set corresponding to a certain value of 7 bits is given, a specific MRU in the set can be determined in combination with the two-bit BS and B0.
  • the MRUx or RUx under the corresponding resource unit size may represent a specific RU/MRU position.
  • the 2-bit BS-B0 adopts the master-slave position indication method, wherein the 2-bit indication may indicate the position in 80MHz where the smallest RU in the RU/MRU is located.
  • the details are shown in Table 4(3):
  • MRU Index is the MRU index. Note that the MRU index does not represent the value obtained by 7 bits or 9 bits in the resource unit allocation subfield, but can be understood as an MRU style, as shown in Table 4(4a) and Table 4(4b) below. MRU index at 160MHz and 320MHz:
  • Embodiment 2 mainly describes the resource unit indication method 120 .
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 120 provided by an embodiment of the present application. Compared with the resource unit indication method 110 shown in FIG. 6, the resource unit indication method 120 shown in FIG. The difference is that the size of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is different, that is, the frequency band range indication in the resource unit indication method 120 is used to indicate the 40MHz where the smallest RU among the MRUs indicated by the resource unit indication is located. As shown in FIG. 15 , the resource unit indication method 120 may include, but is not limited to, the following steps:
  • the access point determines the trigger frame
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRU allocated to the corresponding station, the frequency band The range indication is used to indicate the 40MHz where the smallest resource unit RU among the MRUs indicated by the resource unit indication is located.
  • the access point sends a trigger frame
  • the station receives the trigger frame from the access point
  • the station determines the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • step S124 the station determines the allocated MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication, including: the station determines the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, and can know that the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is the smallest among the MRUs.
  • the assigned RU is in the 40MHz, and then the assigned MRU is obtained in combination with the index indicated by the resource unit.
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (52+26)-tone RU, the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is (52+26)-tone RU in the 40MHz where the 26-tone RU is located;
  • the indicated MRU is (106+26)-tone RU, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 40MHz where the 26-tone RU in the frequency band range indication is (106+26)-tone RU; or the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (484 +242)-tone RU, the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is (484+242)-tone RU in the 40MHz where the 242-tone RU is located; or the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (996+484)-tone RU , the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 40MHz where the 484-tone RU in the (996+484)-tone RU is located; or the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (2*996+484)-tone RU, the frequency band range indication
  • the 40MHz where the 996-tone RU is located means the 40MHz covered by the 996-tone RU. Since there are two 40MHz covered by the 996-tone RU, the frequency range indication can indicate the location of any one of the two 40MHz. , or the position of the 40 MHz with the lowest frequency in the two 40 MHz is pre-defined, or the position of the 40 MHz with the highest frequency in the two 40 MHz is pre-defined.
  • the frequency band range indicates that the first to third bits in the resource unit allocation subfield are denoted as B0, B1, and B2. Then, B0, B1, B2 indicate a 40MHz of the 320MHz. Assuming that as shown in Table 5, Table 3 is each 40MHz to be indicated by the frequency band range indication (B0, B1, B2) to indicate the 40MHz where the smallest RU is located among the MRUs indicated by the resource unit indication. Among them, each 40MHz frequency band range in 320MHz is called the first 40MHz, the second 40MHz, the third 40MHz, the fourth 40MHz, the fifth 40MHz, the sixth 40MHz, the sixth 40MHz, the sixth Seven 40MHz, eighth 40MHz. As shown in Table 5, B0B1B2 are different values, respectively representing the above-mentioned eight 40MHz.
  • the resource unit indicates that the resource unit is allocated the fourth to ninth bits in the subfield, denoted as B3 to B8. Then, in combination with the frequency band range indication and each RU or MRU to be indicated, the resource unit indicating the RU or MRU to be indicated may be as shown in but not limited to Table 6.
  • the first column in Table 6 is the value of B3 to B8, which can be called the index indicated by the resource unit indication; the second column in Table 6 represents the size of the resource unit corresponding to each index; the third column in Table 6 represents each resource unit The number of indexes corresponding to the size, that is, the number of entries. Wherein, each index in Table 6 may be combined with the frequency band range indication to determine the corresponding RU or MRU.
  • a 26-tone RU in 40MHz has 18 positions, and the resource unit indication is based on the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, by indicating one of the indices 0 to 17 shown in Table 6 to indicate the corresponding A 26-tone RU in that 40MHz.
  • this embodiment reduces the number of indices required to indicate the position of a 26-tone RU in the bandwidth.
  • the 52-tone RU in 40MHz has 8 positions, and the resource unit indication is based on the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, by indicating an index among the indexes 18 to 25 shown in Table 6, to Indicates a 52-tone RU in the corresponding 40MHz.
  • this embodiment reduces the number of indices required to indicate the position of a 52-tone RU in the bandwidth.
  • the 106-tone RU in 40MHz has 4 positions, and the resource unit indication is based on the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, by indicating an index among the indexes 26 to 29 shown in Table 6, to Indicates a 106-tone RU in the corresponding 40MHz.
  • the 242-tone RU in 40MHz has 2 positions, and the resource unit indication is based on the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, by indicating an index among the indexes 30 to 31 shown in Table 6, to Indicates a 242-tone RU in the corresponding 40MHz.
  • the 484-tone RU in 40MHz has one location, and the resource unit indication is based on the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, and the index 32 shown in Table 6 is indicated to indicate that the corresponding 40MHz is 484-tone RU.
  • the frequency band range indication can indicate any one of the two 40MHz; correspondingly, the resource unit indication can be based on the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication,
  • the index 33 as shown in Table 6, to indicate the 996-tone RU corresponding to the 40MHz.
  • the frequency band range indication is 000.
  • the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication is the first 40MHz in the 320MHz;
  • the index indicated by the resource unit indication is 33.
  • the RU corresponding to the index 33 It is a 996-tone RU.
  • the 996-tone RU indicated by the resource unit indication is the first 996-tone RU in the 320MHz.
  • the frequency band range indication can indicate a 996-
  • the location of the 2*996-tone RU can be known at the 40MHz where the tone RU is located, so the resource unit indication only needs one index 34.
  • the station can determine that the 40MHz where the smallest RU in the MRU is located is the first 40MHz, and the RU size corresponding to the index 34 indicated by the resource unit indication is 2*996-tone RU, so the station can It is known that the allocated 2*996-tone RU corresponds to the main 160MHz.
  • the resource unit indication can indicate an index of 35, which can make the station know that the allocated RU is 4*996-tone RU.
  • the (52+26)-tone RU in 20MHz has three combinations as shown in Figure 7. Therefore, on the basis of the 40MHz where the 26-tone RU indicated by the frequency band range indication is located, the resource unit indication also needs to indicate one of the indexes 36 to 41 to indicate the corresponding one of the 40MHz (52+26) -tone RU. Among them, the corresponding relationship between each index in index 36 to index 41 and each of the six (52+26)-tone RUs (52+26)-tone RU can be determined by the size of the index to the six (52+ 26)-tone RU's starting frequencies are sorted one-to-one from low to high.
  • the (106+26)-tone RU in 20MHz has two combinations as shown in Figure 8. Therefore, (106+26)-tone RU in 40MHz has 4 (ie 2*2) combinations. Therefore, on the basis of the 40MHz where the 26-tone RU indicated by the frequency band range indication is located, the resource unit indication also needs to indicate one of the indexes 42 to 45 to indicate the corresponding one of the 40MHz (106+26) -tone RU. Among them, the corresponding relationship between each index in index 42 to index 45 and each (106+26)-tone RU among the 8 kinds of (106+26)-tone RUs 26)-tone RU's starting frequencies are sorted one-to-one from low to high.
  • the (484+242)-tone RU in 80MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 9. Therefore, on the basis of the 40MHz where the 242-tone RU indicated by the frequency band range indication is located, the position of the 484-tone RU in the (484+242)-tone RU is also fixed. Therefore, the resource unit indication only needs to indicate the 242-tone RU.
  • the RU can be in one of the two positions in the 40MHz. Therefore, the resource unit indication also needs to indicate one of the indexes 46 to 47 to indicate the corresponding one (484+242)-tone RU.
  • each index in index 46 to index 47 and the two positions of the 242-tone RU in the 40MHz can be based on the size of the index, and the starting frequency of the 242-tone RU in the two positions is from low to low. High ranking one-to-one correspondence.
  • index 46 corresponds to the first 242-tone RU in 40MHz
  • index 47 corresponds to the second 242-tone RU in 40MHz.
  • the (996+484)-tone RU can be located within the master 160MHz or within the slave 160MHz, the (996+484)-tone RU in 160MHz has four combinations as shown in FIG. 10 . Therefore, on the basis of the 40MHz where the 484-tone RU indicated by the frequency band range indication is located, the station can directly know the location of the 996-tone RU and the 484-tone RU in the (996+484)-tone RU, so the resource unit indicates Just indicate an index 48.
  • the band range indication can indicate the 40MHz where the 484-tone RU in the (996+484)-tone RU is located, and the resource element indication can indicate the index 48 to inform the station that the allocated RU size is (996+484 )-tone RU.
  • the station can determine the allocated (996+484)-tone according to the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication, combined with the index 48 indicated by the resource unit indication and Table 6. RU location.
  • the (2*996+484)-tone RU indicated by the limited resource unit indication can only exist in the 240MHz with the lowest frequency or the highest frequency among the 320MHz.
  • (2*996+484)-tone RU in 240MHz has six combinations as shown in Figure 11, that is, for 240MHz with the lowest or highest frequency in 320MHz, (2*996+484)-tone RU has 6 kind of combination.
  • the remaining two 996-tone RUs can be the two 996-tones in the 240MHz with the lowest frequency RU can also be two 996-tone RUs in the 240MHz with the highest frequency, that is, the resource unit indication requires two indexes, such as index 52 and index 53, one index corresponds to the lowest frequency 240MHz, and one index corresponds to the highest frequency. 240MHz.
  • the (2*996+484)-tone RU indicated by the unrestricted resource unit indication can only exist in the 240MHz with the lowest frequency or the highest frequency among the 320MHz. In this way, on the basis of the 40MHz where the 484-tone RU is located in the (2*996+484)-tone RU indicated by the frequency band range indication, the remaining two 996-tone RUs can be 320MHz except the 80MHz where the 484-tone RU is located.
  • the resource unit indication In addition to any two 996-tone RUs in the remaining three 996-tone RUs, the resource unit indication also needs to indicate three indexes, namely index 49 to index 51, to indicate the corresponding (2*996+484)- The location of tone RU.
  • the (3*996)-tone RU in 320MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 12. Therefore, based on the 40MHz where the 996-tone RU indicated by the frequency band range indication is located, there are three options for the remaining two 996-tone RUs in the (3*996)-tone RU in 320MHz, so the resource unit indication also needs to indicate the index One of 52 to index 54 to indicate a position of the remaining two 996-tone RUs combined with the 996-tone RU corresponding to the 40MHz in 320MHz.
  • each index in index 52 to index 54 and one of the three options of the remaining two 996-tone RUs can be based on the size of the index, starting with the two 996-tone RUs selected for each The frequencies are sorted one-to-one from low to high.
  • the size of the MRU indicated by the resource element indication is (3*996)-tone RU
  • the access point allocates the (3*996)-tone RU shown in the last row of Figure 12 to the station, it needs to set the corresponding B0B1B2 of the station to 000 (or 001), B3 to B8 in combination with Table 5 Set to 52; further, the station knows that the 40MHz where the minimum RU of the MRU is located is the first or second 40MHz in the 320MHz, and the RU size corresponding to the indexes indicated by B3 to B8 is (3*996)-tone RU, and Index 52 of B3 to B8.
  • the station can know that the allocated (3*996)-tone RU is the (3*996)-tone RU shown in the third row of FIG. 12 according to the index 52.
  • the (3*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz has eight combinations as shown in Figure 13. Therefore, based on the 40MHz where the 484-tone RU indicated by the frequency band range indication is located, there is only one choice for the remaining three 996-tone RUs in 320MHz, and the location of the 484-tone RU is determined, so the resource unit indication only needs one Index 54 will do.
  • a (484+242)-tone RU in 80MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 14, so there are eight combinations of (996+484+242)-tone RU in 160MHz. Therefore, on the basis of the 40MHz where the 242-tone RU indicated by the band range indication is located, there is only one choice for the 996-tone RU outside the 80MHz in 160MHz, but there are two positions for the 242-tone RU in 40MHz, Therefore, the resource unit indication also needs to indicate one of the indexes 55 to 56 to indicate a position of the 242-tone RU in 40MHz.
  • each index in index 55 to index 56 and the two positions of the 242-tone RU in 40MHz can be determined from the starting frequency of the two positions of the 242-tone RU in 40MHz according to the size of the index. Sort low to high one-to-one correspondence.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication can also inform the frequency range where the smallest RU in the MRU is located, it is beneficial for the resource unit indication to use fewer indexes to indicate various possible positions of the MRU respectively.
  • the resource unit indication For the eight combinations of (996+484+242)-tone RUs, as shown in Table 6, the resource unit indication only needs 2 indexes to indicate each combination respectively.
  • the resource unit indication only needs one index to indicate each combination respectively.
  • the frequency band range indication in the resource unit indication method 120 can carry more information, that is, it can carry the 40MHz where the smallest RU in the MRU is located. For example, if the frequency band range indication only indicates the lowest 80MHz related to the MRU, then for the four combinations of (996+484)-tone RUs shown in Figure 10, the resource element indication requires four indices to indicate each combination respectively; if the frequency band The range indication is used to indicate the 40MHz where the smallest RU in the MRU is located. As shown in Table 6, the resource unit indication only needs one index to indicate each combination of (996+484)-tone RUs in combination with the frequency band range indication . Therefore, the frequency band range indication in the resource unit indication method 120 can carry more information, which is beneficial for the resource unit indication to use fewer indexes to respectively indicate various possible positions of the MRU.
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located.
  • 80 MHz in the above resource unit indication method 110 and 40 MHz in the above resource unit indication method 120 it may also be 160 MHz, 240 MHz or 320MHz. That is, in a resource unit indication method, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 160 MHz where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located. In another resource unit indication method, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 240MHz where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located. In yet another resource unit indication method, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 320 MHz where the smallest RU among the MRUs is located. For the related content of these resource unit indication methods, reference may be made to the resource unit indication method 110 and the resource unit indication method 120 above, which will not be described in detail here.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication may be the frequency band range with the lowest frequency covered by the minimum RU Or the frequency band range with the highest frequency, or the selection of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication may be any frequency band range or a preset frequency band range.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is smaller than the smallest RU in the MRU, the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the frequency band range with the lowest frequency corresponding to the smallest RU.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the frequency band range with the highest frequency corresponding to the smallest RU.
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is a (3*996)-tone RU
  • the minimum RU of the (3*996)-tone RU is a 996-tone RU.
  • the 40MHz indicated by the indication is smaller than the minimum RU, so the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication can be any 40MHz in the 996-tone RU, or it can be the predefined 40MHz or the frequency with the lowest frequency in the 996-tone RU up to 40MHz.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication can be arbitrary or preset, such as the frequency band range where the first smallest RU is located or the frequency band range where the last smallest RU is located.
  • the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication can be the 80MHz where any 996-tone RU is located , or the 80MHz where the first 996-tone RU in the (3*996)-tone RU is located, or the 80MHz where the last 996-tone RU in the (3*996)-tone RU is located.
  • the present application also provides some resource unit indication methods. If the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (2*996+484)-tone RU, the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication is the first or When the second 80MHz is used, it means that the 240MHz where the (2*996+484)-tone RU is located is the first to third 80MHz in the 320MHz, and the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication is the third or fourth in the 320MHz When it is 80MHz, it means that the 240MHz where the (2*996+484)-tone RU is located is the second to fourth 80MHz in the 320MHz. In this way, the station can learn the 240MHz where the (2*996+484)-tone RU indicated by the resource unit indication is located based on the frequency band range indication.
  • Embodiment 3 This embodiment 3 mainly describes the resource unit indication method 210 .
  • the present application also provides a resource unit indication method 210.
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate where some or all of the resource unit RUs in the bandwidth except the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication are located. frequency band range.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 210 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 16 , the resource unit indication method 210 may include but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the access point determines the trigger frame
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the RU/MRU allocated to the corresponding station, the frequency band range The indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where some or all of the resource units RUs other than the RU/MRU in the bandwidth are located;
  • the access point sends a trigger frame
  • the station receives the trigger frame
  • the station determines the allocated RU/MRU according to the resource unit indication and the frequency band range indication.
  • the station determining the allocated RU/MRU according to the resource unit indication and the frequency band range indication may include: the station removes the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication from the frequency band range other than the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication from 320 MHz. .
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is -40MHz in the bandwidth; the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from a frequency band range other than the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication.
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the frequency band range except the first 40MHz in the 320MHz. If the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (3*996+484)-tone RU, then as shown in Figure 13, the (3*996+484)-tone RU indicated by the resource unit indication is divided by the first one from 320MHz It is determined in a frequency range other than 40MHz, that is, a (3*996+484)-tone RU shown in the second row in Figure 13.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is -80MHz in the bandwidth; the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from a frequency band range other than the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the first 80MHz in the 320MHz
  • the second to fourth 80MHz except the first 80MHz in the 320MHz determine the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication ; If the indicated MRU of the resource unit indication is 3*996-tone RU, then the 3*996-tone RU corresponding to the second to fourth 80MHz is the MRU allocated by the site, as shown in the first row in Figure 12 3*996-tone RU shown.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one 160MHz in the bandwidth; the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the remaining 160MHz except the 160MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the main 160MHz of the 320MHz; the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the 320MHz and the secondary 160MHz. If the size of the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (996+484)-tone RU, as shown in FIG. 10 , the resource unit indication needs to use 4 indexes to use one index to indicate one (996+484) in FIG. 10 )-tone RU.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is a frequency band range that is not related to the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication, that is, the station needs to operate from a frequency band outside the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication. Determine the RU/MRU indicated by the resource element indication in the frequency band.
  • Embodiment 4 mainly describes the resource unit indication method 220 .
  • the present application also provides a resource unit indication method 220.
  • the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band range in the bandwidth, and the RU/MRU allocated by the station includes the bandwidth other than the frequency band range in the bandwidth. ru.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 220 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 17 , the resource unit indication method 220 may include but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the access point determines the trigger frame
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the RU/MRU allocated to the corresponding station, the frequency band range Indicates a frequency band range for indicating the bandwidth; the MRU includes the remaining RUs in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication;
  • the access point sends a trigger frame
  • the station determines the allocated RU/MRU according to the resource unit indication and the frequency band range indication.
  • the station determining the allocated RU/MRU according to the resource unit indication and the frequency band range indication may include: the station uses the RU/MRU corresponding to the frequency band range in 320MHz except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication as the allocated RU/MRU. MRU.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is -40MHz in the bandwidth; the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes the remaining RUs in the bandwidth except the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication.
  • the RUs in the 320MHz except the first 40MHz, as shown in Figure 13 are 484-tone RUs and 3 996-tone RUs respectively.
  • tone RU if the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is (3*996+484)-tone RU, then the MRU is the RU in the 320MHz except the first 40MHz, as shown in the second row in Figure 13 (3*996+484)-tone RU.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is -80MHz in the bandwidth; the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes the remaining RUs in the bandwidth except the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the first 80MHz in the 320MHz, then the second to fourth 80MHz in the 320MHz except the first 80MHz, if the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is 3* 996-tone RU, then the 3*996-tone RU corresponding to the second to fourth 80MHz is the MRU allocated by the site, such as the 3*996-tone RU shown in the first row in Figure 12.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one 160MHz in the bandwidth; the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication includes the remaining RUs except the 160MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is the main 160MHz in 320MHz
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is the 2*996-tone RU corresponding to the secondary 160MHz.
  • the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is the RU/MRU corresponding to the frequency band range outside the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication. It is beneficial to save the number of indexes required to indicate the resource unit indication, and can also simplify the processing logic, which is beneficial to reduce the processing complexity of the site.
  • the fifth embodiment mainly describes the resource unit indication method 310 .
  • the present application further provides a resource unit indication method.
  • the granularity of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is related to the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication.
  • the granularity of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 80MHz; when the frequency band range occupied by the RU/MRU is greater than 80MHz and less than or equal to 160MHz, The granularity of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 160MHz; when the frequency band range occupied by the RU/MRU is greater than 160MHz and less than 320MHz, the granularity of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 320MHz.
  • the possibility of adding the 240MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication is also added, then when the frequency band range occupied by the RU/MRU is greater than 160MHz and less than or equal to 240MHz, the granularity of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 240MHz; When the frequency band range occupied by the MRU is greater than 240 MHz and less than or equal to 320 MHz, the granularity of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 320 MHz.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication actually refers to the size and position of the frequency band range, that is, the position of the frequency range in the bandwidth or the frequency band range in the bandwidth.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one 80MHz in the bandwidth, indicating that the granularity of the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 80MHz and the position of the 80MHz in the bandwidth.
  • frequency band range indicates the first two bits in the resource unit allocation subfield, denoted as B0 and B1. in:
  • the B0 and B1 can represent 4 states to respectively indicate four 80MHz of the 320MHz;
  • 0 or 1 of the B0 indicates the highest frequency 160MHz or the lowest frequency 160MHz, wherein B1 can be reserved; in another way, it can also be The highest frequency 160MHz or the lowest frequency 160MHz is indicated by B1's 0 or 1, and B0 is reserved; in another way, B0 corresponds to the highest frequency 160MHz, and B1 corresponds to the lowest frequency 160MHz. If B0 is set to 1, it means the frequency band range indication The indicated frequency band range is 160MHz with the highest frequency.
  • B1 If B1 is set to 1, it means that the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 160MHz with the lowest frequency; in another way, two of the four states indicated by B0 and B1 can be used. This state is indicated, for example, 00 corresponds to the lowest frequency of 240MHz, and 01 corresponds to the highest frequency of 240MHz.
  • the application does not limit the values of B0 and B1, which can be reserved or set arbitrarily; in another way, One of the four states indicated by B0 and B1 can be adopted, such as 00, to indicate that the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 320MHz.
  • B0 and B1 can represent four states to respectively indicate four combinations of 240MHz in 320MHz;
  • B0 corresponds to the highest frequency 240MHz
  • B1 corresponds to the lowest frequency 240MHz. If B0 is set to 1, it means that the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indicator is the highest frequency 240MHz , if B1 is set to 1, it means that the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 240MHz with the lowest frequency; in another way, two of the four states represented by B0 and B1 can be used to represent the continuous 240MHz, such as 00 Corresponding to the lowest frequency of 240MHz, 01 corresponds to the highest frequency of 240MHz.
  • the resource unit indication method 310 is described by taking "the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located" as an example. Please refer to FIG. 18.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 310 provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 18, the resource unit indication method 310 may include but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the access point determines the trigger frame
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate that resources are allocated to a station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the RU/MRU allocated to the corresponding station; the frequency band range The indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located;
  • the access point sends a trigger frame
  • the station receives the trigger frame
  • the station determines the allocated RU/MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the relationship between the MRU/RU indicated by the resource unit indication and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication may be:
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one 80MHz in the bandwidth
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one 160MHz in the bandwidth
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one of 240MHz or 320MHz in the bandwidth;
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is one 320 MHz in the bandwidth.
  • the number of indexes to be indicated by the resource unit indication can be combined with the above-mentioned Fig. 3, Fig. 7 to Fig. 14.
  • the index table shown in Table 7 is obtained.
  • the frequency band range where the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located is less than or equal to 80MHz, so the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication is the 80MHz where the RU/MRU is located.
  • the number of entries corresponding to each RU/MRU size is equal to the number of optional locations for RU/MRU of that size in 80MHz.
  • the number of indexes corresponding to 26-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of 26-tone RU in 80MHz, 36, and each index corresponds to a 26-tone RU in 80MHz.
  • the index number corresponding to (52+26)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (52+26)-tone RU in 80MHz, as shown in Figure 7, in 80MHz (52+26)-tone There are 12 (ie 4*3) kinds of optional positions of RU. Therefore, the resource unit indication requires 12 indices to indicate each (52+26)-tone RU in 80MHz respectively.
  • the index number corresponding to (106+26)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (106+26)-tone RU in 80MHz, as shown in Figure 8, in 80MHz (106+26)-tone There are 8 optional positions for RU. Therefore, the resource unit indication requires 8 indices to indicate each (106+26)-tone RU in 80MHz respectively.
  • the index number corresponding to (484+242)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (484+242)-tone RU in 80MHz, as shown in Figure 9, in 80MHz (484+242)-tone There are four optional positions for RU. Therefore, the resource unit indication requires 4 indices to indicate each (484+242)-tone RU in 80MHz respectively.
  • the frequency band range where the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is greater than 80MHz and less than or equal to 160MHz, so the 160MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication is the 160MHz where the RU/MRU is located.
  • the number of entries corresponding to each RU/MRU size is equal to the number of optional positions of RU/MRU of this size in 160 MHz.
  • the number of indices corresponding to 2*996-tone RUs is equal to the number of optional positions 1 for 2*996-tone RUs in 160MHz, that is, the resource unit indication only needs to indicate one index, and the station can be combined with the frequency band range indication. Know the 2*996-tone RU allocated.
  • the number of indices corresponding to (996+484)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (996+484)-tone RU in 160MHz 4 (as shown in Figure 10), that is, 4 resource unit indications are required Index to indicate each (996+484)-tone RU in 160MHz respectively.
  • Implementation 1 is to introduce the 240MHz frequency band
  • implementation 2 is to not introduce the 240MHz frequency band. range, as described below.
  • a frequency band range of 240 MHz exists in the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication.
  • the frequency band range of the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is greater than 160MHz and less than or equal to 240MHz, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 240MHz, that is, the 240MHz where the RU/MRU is located.
  • the number of entries corresponding to each RU/MRU size is equal to the number of optional locations for RU/MRU of this size in 240MHz.
  • the index number corresponding to (2*996+484)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (2*996+484)-tone RU in 240MHz 6 (the number of optional positions shown in Figure 11 is 6), that is, the resource unit indication 6 indices (index 97 to index 102 as shown in Table 7) are required to indicate each (2*996+484)-tone RU in 240MHz respectively.
  • the index number corresponding to 3*996-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of 3*996-tone RU in 240MHz 1, that is, the resource unit indication needs 1 index to indicate 3*996-tone RU in 240MHz.
  • the frequency band range of the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is greater than 240MHz and less than or equal to 320MHz, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 320MHz, that is, the 320MHz where the RU/MRU is located.
  • the number of entries corresponding to each RU/MRU size is equal to the number of optional locations for RU/MRU of this size in 320 MHz.
  • the number of indexes corresponding to 4*996-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of 4*996-tone RU in 320MHz 1, that is, the resource unit indicates that 1 index (index 68 shown in Table 7) is required to indicate the 4* 996-tone RU.
  • the number of indices corresponding to (3*996+484)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (3*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz 8 (as shown in Figure 13), that is, the resource unit indication requires 8 indices ( Index 107 to Index 114 as shown in Table 7) to indicate each (3*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz.
  • the number of indexes corresponding to (996+484+242)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (996+484+242)-tone RU in 320MHz 8 (2*4 optional positions shown in Figure 14), that is, resources
  • the cell indication requires 8 indices (index 115 to index 122 as shown in Table 7) to indicate each (996+484+242)-tone RU in 320MHz.
  • the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication does not have a frequency band range of 240 MHz.
  • the frequency band range where the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is greater than 160MHz and less than or equal to 320MHz, and the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication is 320MHz, that is, the 320MHz where the RU/MRU is located.
  • the number of entries corresponding to each RU/MRU size is equal to the number of optional locations for RU/MRU of this size in 320 MHz.
  • the number of indexes corresponding to (2*996+484)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (2*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz 12 (2*The number of optional positions shown in Figure 11 is 6), that is, the resource The unit indication requires 12 indices to indicate each (2*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz respectively.
  • the number of indexes corresponding to 4*996-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of 4*996-tone RU in 320MHz 1, that is, the resource unit indicates that 1 index (index 68 shown in Table 7) is required to indicate the 4* 996-tone RU.
  • the number of indexes corresponding to 3*996-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of 3*996-tone RU in 320MHz 4 (as shown in Figure 12), that is, the resource unit indicates that 4 indexes are required (as shown in Table 7. Index 103 to index 106) to indicate each 3*996-tone RU in 320MHz.
  • the number of indices corresponding to (3*996+484)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (3*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz 8 (as shown in Figure 13), that is, the resource unit indication requires 8 indices ( Index 107 to Index 114 as shown in Table 7) to indicate each (3*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz.
  • the number of indexes corresponding to (996+484+242)-tone RU is equal to the number of optional positions of (996+484+242)-tone RU in 320MHz 8 (2*4 optional positions shown in Figure 14), that is, resources
  • the cell indication requires 8 indices (index 115 to index 122 as shown in Table 7) to indicate each (996+484+242)-tone RU in 320MHz.
  • the number of indexes corresponding to each RU/MRU may be determined in a one-to-one correspondence between the number of indexes from small to large and the starting frequencies of RUs/MRUs from low to high.
  • the sequence of the starting frequencies of the second RU is determined, and so on.
  • the RUs with the same starting frequency are arranged in order of size.
  • the number of indices corresponding to (2*996+484)-tone RU in implementation 1 is index 97 to index 102, and the starting frequency of each (2*996+484)-tone RU in 240MHz is from low to high
  • the order is: the first combination of the second row in Figure 11, the first combination of the third row in Figure 11, the second combination of the third row in Figure 11, the first combination of the first row in Figure 11 Combination, the second combination in the second row in Figure 11, the second combination in the first row in Figure 11. Therefore, index 97 represents the first combination of the second row in Figure 11, index 98 represents the first combination of the third row in Figure 11, index 99 represents the second combination of the third row in Figure 11, and index 100 It represents the first combination of the first row in FIG. 11 , the index 101 represents the second combination of the second row in FIG. 11 , and the index 102 represents the second combination of the first row in FIG. 11 .
  • the number of indexes corresponding to each RU/MRU can be the same as the RUs punched in the RU/MRU (that is, the RUs not included in the RU/MRU) according to the index number from small to large. ) are determined in a one-to-one order from low to high starting frequencies.
  • the frequency of the punctured RU in the bandwidth where the 3*996-tone RU shown in the first row is located is the lowest, so it corresponds to the smallest index;
  • the frequency of the punched RU in the bandwidth of the 3*996-tone RU shown in the third row is higher, so Corresponds to the next largest index;
  • the 3*996-tone RU shown in the fourth row has the highest frequency of puncturing in the bandwidth where the RU is located, so it corresponds to the largest index.
  • the number of indexes corresponding to each RU/MRU can be determined in a one-to-one correspondence between the number of indexes from small to large and the weight of the RU/MRU in the order of the frequency of RUs from high to low. .
  • the three 996-tone RUs in the 3*996-tone RU shown in the first row have the highest frequencies, so they correspond to the smallest index; the second row shows The frequencies of two 996-tone RUs in the 3*996-tone RU of the , so it corresponds to the next largest index; the frequencies of the three 996-tone RUs in the 3*996-tone RU shown in the fourth row are all the lowest, so they correspond to the largest index.
  • the station when the station determines the allocated RU/MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication, it can determine the size of the RU/MRU corresponding to the index indicated by the resource unit indication in Table 7 to determine The frequency band range indicates the frequency band range in which the indicated RU/MRU is located, and then the RU/MRU corresponding to the index indicated by the resource unit indication is determined within the frequency band range.
  • the resource unit indication can directly indicate the RU/MRU in the frequency band range. While using the frequency band range indication to carry more information, the logic is simplified as much as possible, which is beneficial to reduce the processing complexity of the site.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield occupies N bits; the frequency band range indicates the occupied bit 0 to bit x, and the resource unit indicates the occupied bit x+1 to bit N; the value of x is related to the bandwidth and all
  • the frequency band range indication is related to the indicated frequency band range; both N and the x are greater than zero. For example, x is equal to 1 in the resource unit indication method 110, or x is equal to 2 in the resource unit indication method 120, or x is equal to 2 in the resource unit indication method 310, and so on.
  • the positions of the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication in the N bits can be interchanged, that is, in the above embodiment, the first two or the first three bits represent the frequency band range indication, and the remaining bits represent the resource unit.
  • the indication can be interchanged as: the first eight or the first seven bits indicate the resource unit indication, and the remaining bits at the back indicate the frequency band range indication.
  • frequency band range described herein may also be referred to as a "frequency range”
  • frequency band range indication may also be referred to as a frequency range indication, wherein the frequency range or the frequency band range each corresponds to a continuous frequency.
  • Embodiment 6 This embodiment 6 mainly describes the resource unit indication method 410 .
  • the present application also provides a resource unit indication method 410.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield corresponding to a site occupies N bits, and an index indicated by the N bits directly represents the absolute position of a multi-resource unit MRU in the bandwidth , and then the station can directly look up the table to learn the allocated MRU according to the index indicated by the N bits. That is to say, the method no longer distinguishes that the first part of bits indicates a certain granularity of frequency band range, and the second part of bits indicates a combination mode related to the frequency band range, so this method can be called a fusion indication mode of resource element indication. Therefore, the logic of the resource unit indication method described in this application is more simplified, and the processing complexity of the site is further reduced. The method is explained below.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of a resource unit indication method 410 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the resource unit indication method 410 shown in FIG. 19 may include, but is not limited to, the following steps:
  • the access point determines the trigger frame
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield for indicating resource allocation to a station, the resource unit allocation subfield occupies N bits, and an index indicated by the N bits directly represents the absolute position of a multi-resource unit MRU in the bandwidth; N is greater than zero;
  • the access point sends a trigger frame
  • the station determines the MRU directly corresponding to the index indicated by the N bits as the MRU allocated by the station.
  • the station may query the MRU corresponding to the index indicated by the N bits from the resource unit allocation table as the MRU allocated to the station.
  • the index indicated by the N bits is the N bits of the resource unit allocation subfield corresponding to the site.
  • the resource unit allocation table may be as shown in Table 8, where N bits are used to indicate the absolute position of each RU/MRU in the bandwidth, and N is equal to 9, denoted as B0 to B8.
  • a 26-tone RU in 80MHz has 36 positions, then a 26-tone RU in 320MHz has 144 positions (ie, 4*36). Therefore, as shown in Table 8, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index from index 0 to index 143 to indicate a 26-tone RU.
  • a 52-tone RU in 80MHz has 16 positions, then a 52-tone RU in 320MHz has 64 positions (ie, 4*16). Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 144 to index 207 to indicate a 52-tone RU.
  • 106-tone RU in 80MHz has 8 positions
  • 106-tone RU in 320MHz has 32 positions (ie, 4*8). Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 144 to index 207 to indicate a 106-tone RU.
  • 242-tone RU in 80MHz has 4 positions
  • 242-tone RU in 320MHz has 16 positions (ie, 4*4). Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 240 to index 255 to indicate a 242-tone RU.
  • the 484-tone RU in 80MHz has 2 positions
  • the 484-tone RU in 320MHz has 8 positions (ie, 4*2). Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 256 to index 263 to indicate a 484-tone RU.
  • the 996-tone RU in 80MHz has 1 position, then the 996-tone RU in 320MHz has 4 positions. Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 264 to index 267 to indicate a 996-tone RU.
  • the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 268 to index 269 to indicate a 2*996-tone RU.
  • the B8 to B0 can indicate an index of 270, which can make the station know that the allocated RU is 4*996-tone RU.
  • the (52+26)-tone RU in 20MHz has three combinations as shown in Figure 7, then the (52+26)-tone RU in 320MHz has 48 combinations (ie, 16*3). Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 271 to index 318 to indicate one (52+26)-tone RU.
  • the (106+26)-tone RU in 20MHz has two combinations as shown in Figure 8, then the (106+26)-tone RU in 320MHz has 32 combinations (ie, 16*2). Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 319 to index 350 to indicate one (106+26)-tone RU.
  • the (484+242)-tone RU in 80MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 9, then the (484+242)-tone RU in 320MHz has 16 combinations (ie, 4*4). Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 351 to index 366 to indicate one (484+242)-tone RU.
  • the (996+484)-tone RU can be located within the master 160MHz or within the slave 160MHz, the (996+484)-tone RU in 160MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 10, then the (996+484)-tone in 320MHz RU has 8 combinations (ie 2*4). Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 367 to index 374 to indicate one (996+484)-tone RU.
  • (2*996+484)-tone RU belongs to 240MHz transmission, it can only exist in 240MHz formed by punching the 80MHz with the lowest or highest frequency in 320MHz. In 240MHz, (2*996+484)-tone RU has The six combinations shown in 11, then (2*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz has 12 combinations (ie 2*6). Therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 375 to index 386 to indicate one (2*996+484)-tone RU.
  • the (3*996)-tone RU in 320MHz has four combinations as shown in FIG. 12, therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 387 to index 390 to indicate one (3*996)-tone RU.
  • the (3*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz has eight combinations as shown in Figure 13, therefore, the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 391 to index 398 to indicate one (3*996+484) -tone RU.
  • the (996+484+242)-tone RU in 160MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 14.
  • the (996+484+242)-tone RU in the 160MHz also has four combinations, so the (996+484+242)-tone RU in 160MHz has eight combinations.
  • (996+484+242)-tone RU can only be located in the lowest frequency 160MHz or the highest frequency 160MHz, therefore, in 320MHz (996+484+242)-tone RU has 16 combinations (ie 2*8),
  • the B8 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 399 to index 414 to indicate one (996+484+242)-tone RU.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield does not distinguish bits dedicated to indicating a certain frequency band range.
  • the corresponding RU/MRU is searched in the middle, which greatly simplifies the processing logic and helps reduce the processing complexity of the site.
  • the present application also provides a resource unit indication method.
  • the resource unit indication method is different from the above resource unit indication method 410 in that the resource unit allocation subfield occupies 8 bits, and the resource unit allocation subfield is used to indicate the RU/MRU associated with the frequency band range of 160MHz.
  • the station can learn whether the RU/MRU-related 160MHz indicated by the resource unit allocation subfield is the primary 160MHz or the secondary 160MHz through other parameters or signaling.
  • the 8 bits occupied by the resource unit allocation subfield are denoted as B7 to B0
  • the B7 to B0 are used to indicate all RUs/MRUs involved in the master 160MHz or the slave 160MHz.
  • the RU/MRU indicated by B7 to B0 may be as shown in Table 9.
  • a 26-tone RU in 80MHz has 36 positions, then a 26-tone RU in 160MHz has 72 positions (ie, 2*36). Therefore, as shown in Table 9, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index from index 0 to index 71 to indicate a 26-tone RU.
  • a 52-tone RU in 80MHz has 16 positions, then a 52-tone RU in 160MHz has 32 positions (ie, 2*16). Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 72 to index 103 to indicate a 52-tone RU.
  • 106-tone RU in 80MHz has 8 positions, then 106-tone RU in 160MHz has 16 positions (ie 2*8). Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 104 to index 119 to indicate a 106-tone RU.
  • a 242-tone RU in 80MHz has 4 positions, then a 242-tone RU in 160MHz has 8 positions (ie, 2*4). Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 120 to index 127 to indicate a 242-tone RU.
  • the 484-tone RU in 80MHz has 2 positions, then the 484-tone RU in 160MHz has 4 positions (ie, 2*2). Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 128 to index 131 to indicate a 484-tone RU.
  • 996-tone RU in 80MHz has 1 position
  • 996-tone RU in 160MHz has 2 positions. Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 132 to index 133 to indicate a 996-tone RU.
  • the B7 to B0 need to indicate index 134 to indicate 2*996-tone RU.
  • B7 to B0 can indicate an index of 135, which can make the station know that the allocated RU is 4*996-tone RU.
  • the (52+26)-tone RU in 20MHz has three combinations as shown in Figure 7, then the (52+26)-tone RU in 160MHz has 24 combinations (ie, 8*3). Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 136 to index 159 to indicate one (52+26)-tone RU.
  • the (106+26)-tone RU in 20MHz has two combinations as shown in Figure 8, then the (106+26)-tone RU in 160MHz has 16 combinations (ie, 8*2). Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 160 to index 175 to indicate one (106+26)-tone RU.
  • the (484+242)-tone RU in 80MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 9, then the (484+242)-tone RU in 160MHz has 8 combinations (ie 2*4). Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 176 to index 183 to indicate one (484+242)-tone RU.
  • the (996+484)-tone RU can be located within the master 160MHz or within the slave 160MHz, the (996+484)-tone RU in 160MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 10, therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate index 184 An index to index 187 to indicate a (996+484)-tone RU.
  • (2*996+484)-tone RU belongs to 240MHz transmission, it can only exist in 240MHz formed by punching the 80MHz with the lowest or highest frequency in 320MHz. In 240MHz, (2*996+484)-tone RU has The six combinations shown in 11, then (2*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz has 12 combinations (ie 2*6). Since the 12 combinations of (2*996+484)-tone RUs all overlap with the master 160MHz or the slave 160MHz, there are 12 combinations of (2*996+484)-tone RUs involved in 160MHz. The B7 to B0 require One index of index 188 to index 195 is indicated to indicate one (2*996+484)-tone RU.
  • the 3*996-tone RU in 320MHz has four combinations as shown in Figure 12. These four combinations are involved in the master 160MHz or the slave 160MHz. Therefore, there are four combinations of 3*996-tone RU involved in 160MHz. B7 to B0 need to indicate one index of index 200 to index 203 to indicate one (3*996)-tone RU.
  • the (3*996+484)-tone RU in 320MHz has eight combinations as shown in Figure 13, and the eight combinations are involved in the master 160MHz or the slave 160MHz. Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate index 204 to index 211 An index to indicate a (3*996+484)-tone RU.
  • the 160MHz (996+484+242)-tone RU has four combinations as shown in Figure 14, correspondingly, in 160MHz (484+ When the 242)-tone RU is located in the second 80MHz, the (996+484+242)-tone RU in the 160MHz also has four combinations, so the (996+484+242)-tone RU in 160MHz has eight combinations. Therefore, the B7 to B0 need to indicate an index of index 212 to index 219 to indicate one (996+484+242)-tone RU.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield can use 8 bits to indicate each RU/MRU involved in 160MHz, which reduces the required number of bits and helps save signaling overhead.
  • each embodiment has its own emphasis. For parts that are not described in detail in a certain embodiment, reference may be made to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments.
  • different embodiments can be combined with each other to indicate the RU/MRU allocated to the station.
  • the relevant content of the resource unit indication and the frequency band range indication can be applied to the resource unit
  • the indication method 110 or the resource unit indication method 120 indicates the partial MRU allocation.
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is the second to fourth 80MHz in the 320MHz except the first 80MHz
  • the corresponding 3*996-tone RU can be applied to the resource unit indication method 110 to replace the index 99 to the index 101 shown in Table 4 with the index 99. In this way, the site combines the meaning of the frequency band range indication in the resource unit indication method 210.
  • the assigned 3*996-tone RU position can be determined.
  • the RU/MRU of each size in Table 4, Table 6, Table 8, or Table 9 and the corresponding index arrangement order and number of indexes are not fixed, and corresponding changes can be made in combination with the above embodiments.
  • Table 3 and Table 4 are relatively independent, and Table 5 and Table 6 are relatively independent.
  • the meanings of the frequency band range indications corresponding to some RUs/MRUs in Table 4 may be different from the meanings described in Table 3.
  • the methods provided by the embodiments of the present application are respectively introduced from the perspectives of access points and sites.
  • the access point and the site may include hardware structures and software modules, and implement the above functions in the form of hardware structures, software modules, or hardware structures plus software modules.
  • a certain function among the above functions may be implemented in the form of a hardware structure, a software module, or a hardware structure plus a software module.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus 500 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 500 shown in FIG. 20 may include a communication unit 501 and a processing unit 502 .
  • the communication unit 501 may include a sending unit and a receiving unit, the sending unit is used to implement the sending function, the receiving unit is used to implement the receiving function, and the communication unit 501 may implement the sending function and/or the receiving function.
  • the communication unit may also be described as a transceiving unit.
  • the communication device 500 may be a station, a device in a station, or an access point or a device in an access point.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the station in the resource unit indication method 110 in the above method embodiments, and the communication apparatus 500 may include a communication unit 501 and a processing unit 502;
  • a communication unit 501 configured to receive a trigger frame from an access point
  • the processing unit 502 is configured to determine the allocated RU/MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the access point in the resource unit indication method 110 in the above method embodiments, the processing unit 502 is used for determining the trigger frame; the communication unit 501 is used for sending the trigger frame.
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to the station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the RU/MRU allocated to the station , the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 80MHz where the smallest RU in the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located.
  • the communication apparatus 500 can allocate MRUs to sites, so that the allocation of MRUs is more flexible, which helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the 80MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication is the 80MHz where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located. Compared with the frequency range indication only indicating the lowest 80MHz related to the MRU, the communication apparatus 500 is beneficial to save the resource unit indication for indicating each MRU Required number of indices.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the station in the resource unit indication method 120 in the above method embodiments, and the communication apparatus 500 may include a communication unit 501 and a processing unit 502;
  • a communication unit 501 configured to receive a trigger frame from an access point
  • the processing unit 502 is configured to determine the allocated RU/MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the access point in the resource unit indication method 120 in the above method embodiments, the processing unit 502 is used for determining the trigger frame; the communication unit 501 is used for sending the trigger frame.
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to the station, and the resource unit allocation subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the RU/MRU allocated to the station , the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the 40MHz where the smallest RU in the RU/MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located.
  • the communication apparatus 500 can allocate MRUs to sites, so that the allocation of MRUs is more flexible, which helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the 40MHz indicated by the frequency band range indication is the 40MHz where the smallest RU in the MRUs is located. Compared with the lowest 80MHz that the frequency band range indication only indicates related to the MRU, the communication device 500 is beneficial to save the resource unit indication for indicating each MRU Required number of indices.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the station in the resource unit indication method 210 in the above method embodiments, and the communication apparatus 500 may include a communication unit 501 and a processing unit 502;
  • a communication unit 501 configured to receive a trigger frame from an access point
  • the processing unit 502 is configured to determine the allocated RU/MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the access point in the resource unit indication method 210 in the above method embodiments, the processing unit 502 is used for determining the trigger frame; the communication unit 501 is used for sending the trigger frame.
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to the station, and the resource unit subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multi-resource unit MRU allocated to the station , and the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range in which some or all of the resource units RUs other than the MRU in the bandwidth are located.
  • the MRU to be indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from a frequency band range smaller than the bandwidth, which is advantageous compared with the fact that the MRU to be indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the frequency band range corresponding to the bandwidth Decrease the number of indexes required to indicate the resource unit indication.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operation of the station in the resource unit indication method 220 in the above method embodiment, or the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operation of the access point in the resource unit indication method 220 in the above method embodiment. operate.
  • the difference between this embodiment and the trigger frame in the resource unit indication method 210 above is that in this embodiment, the resource unit indication is used to indicate the multiple resource unit MRUs allocated to the site, and the frequency band range indication is used to indicate a frequency band range, The MRU includes the remaining RUs in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication.
  • the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is a combination of the remaining RUs in the bandwidth except the frequency band range indicated by the frequency band range indication, the MRU that needs to be indicated by the resource unit indication is determined from the frequency band range corresponding to the bandwidth.
  • the communication apparatus 500 is beneficial to reduce the number of indexes required to indicate the resource unit indication.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the station in the resource unit indication method 310 in the above method embodiments, and the communication apparatus 500 may include a communication unit 501 and a processing unit 502;
  • a communication unit 501 configured to receive a trigger frame from an access point
  • the processing unit 502 is configured to determine the allocated RU/MRU according to the frequency band range indication and the resource unit indication.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the access point in the resource unit indication method 310 in the above method embodiments, the processing unit 502 is used for determining the trigger frame; the communication unit 501 is used for sending the trigger frame.
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, and the resource unit subfield includes a frequency band range indication and a resource unit indication; the resource unit indication is used to indicate multiple resource units allocated to the station MRU, the frequency band range indication is used to indicate the frequency band range where the MRU indicated by the resource unit indication is located.
  • the resource unit indication in the communication apparatus 500 can only indicate the RU/MRU in the frequency band range, which reduces the number of indexes that the resource unit indication needs to indicate in order to indicate the MRU of this size. That is to say, the frequency band range indication in the communication apparatus 500 can carry more information, and the logic of the resource unit indication is simplified as much as possible, which is beneficial to reduce the processing complexity of the station.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the station in the resource unit indication method 410 in the above method embodiments, and the communication apparatus 500 may include a communication unit 501 and a processing unit 502;
  • a communication unit 501 configured to receive a trigger frame from an access point
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield used to indicate resource allocation to a station, the resource unit subfield occupies N bits, and an index indicated by the N bits directly represents the absolute position of a multi-resource unit MRU in the bandwidth; N is greater than zero;
  • the processing unit 502 is configured to determine the MRU directly corresponding to the index indicated by the N bits as the MRU allocated by the station.
  • the communication apparatus 500 may perform the related operations of the access point in the resource unit indication method 410 in the above method embodiments, the processing unit 502 is used for determining the trigger frame; the communication unit 501 is used for sending the trigger frame.
  • the trigger frame includes a resource unit allocation subfield for indicating resource allocation to a station, the resource unit allocation subfield occupies N bits, and an index indicated by the N bits directly represents the absolute position of a multi-resource unit MRU in the bandwidth; N Greater than zero.
  • the resource unit allocation subfield in the communication device 500 does not distinguish bits dedicated to indicating a certain frequency band range, and the corresponding MRU can be directly searched according to the index indicated by the N bits in the resource unit allocation subfield, thereby greatly reducing the
  • the processing logic is simplified, which is beneficial to reduce the processing complexity of the site.
  • the communication device may also execute the relevant implementation manners described in any of the foregoing method embodiments, which will not be described in detail here.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication apparatus 600 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 600 may be an access point, a site, a chip, a chip system, or a processor that supports the access point to implement the above method, or a chip, a chip system, or a chip that supports the site to implement the above method. or processor etc.
  • the communication device may be used to implement the methods described in the foregoing method embodiments, and for details, reference may be made to the descriptions in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • Communication apparatus 600 may include one or more processors 601 .
  • the processor 601 may be a general-purpose processor or a special-purpose processor, or the like.
  • the processor 601 may be used to control a communication device (eg, an access point, an access point chip, a site, a site chip, etc.), execute a software program, and process data of the software program.
  • a communication device eg, an access point, an access point chip, a site, a site chip, etc.
  • the communication apparatus 600 may include one or more memories 602, and instructions 604 may be stored thereon, and the instructions may be executed on the processor 601, so that the communication apparatus 600 executes the methods described in the foregoing method embodiments. Methods.
  • the memory 602 may also store data.
  • the processor 601 and the memory 602 may be provided separately or integrated together.
  • the communication apparatus 600 may further include a transceiver 605 and an antenna 606 .
  • the transceiver 605 may be referred to as a transceiver unit, a transceiver, or a transceiver circuit, etc., for implementing a transceiver function.
  • the transceiver 605 may include a receiver and a transmitter, the receiver may be called a receiver or a receiving circuit, etc., for implementing a receiving function; the transmitter may be called a transmitter or a transmitting circuit, etc., for implementing a transmitting function.
  • the communication device 600 may be a site, or a device in a site, or the like. In this embodiment:
  • the transceiver 605 is configured to perform the operation of S113 in FIG. 6; perform the operation of S123 in FIG. 15; perform the operation of S213 in FIG. 16; perform the operation of S223 in FIG. 17;
  • the operation of S313 in FIG. 19 is performed; the operation of S413 in FIG. 19 is performed; the processor 601 is used to perform the operation of S114 in FIG. 6 ; the operation of S124 in FIG. 15 is performed; the operation of S214 in FIG. 16 is performed;
  • the operation of S224 in FIG. 18 is performed; the operation of S314 in FIG. 18 is performed; the operation of S414 in FIG. 19 is performed.
  • the communication device 600 may be an access point, or a device in an access point, or the like.
  • the communication device 600 may be an access point, or a device in an access point, or the like.
  • the transceiver 605 is configured to perform the operation of S112 in FIG. 6; perform the operation of S122 in FIG. 15; perform the operation of S212 in FIG. 16; perform the operation of S222 in FIG. 17;
  • the operation of S312 in FIG. 19 is performed; the operation of S412 in FIG. 19 is performed;
  • the processor 601 is used to perform the operation of S111 in FIG. 6 ; the operation of S121 in FIG. 15 is performed; the operation of S211 in FIG.
  • the operation of S221 in FIG. 18 is performed; the operation of S311 in FIG. 18 is performed; the operation of S411 in FIG. 19 is performed.
  • the communication apparatus 600 can allocate MRUs to the sites, so that the allocation of MRUs is more flexible and helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the frequency band range indication described in this application carries more information, which is conducive to saving the number of indexes required by the resource unit indication for indicating each MRU; or the communication device 600 performs the relevant operations in FIG. 19 , which can simplify the Processing logic to reduce the processing burden of the site.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, or an interface, or an interface circuit.
  • Transceiver circuits, interfaces or interface circuits used to implement receiving and transmitting functions may be separate or integrated.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver circuit, interface or interface circuit can be used for reading and writing code/data, or the above-mentioned transceiver circuit, interface or interface circuit can be used for signal transmission or transmission.
  • the processor 601 may store instructions 603, and the instructions 603 run on the processor 601, so that the communication apparatus 600 can execute the methods described in the above method embodiments.
  • the instructions 603 may be hardened in the processor 601, in which case the processor 601 may be implemented by hardware.
  • the communication apparatus 600 may include a circuit, and the circuit may implement the functions of sending or receiving or communicating in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • processors and transceivers described in this application can be implemented in integrated circuits (ICs), analog ICs, radio frequency integrated circuits (RFICs), mixed-signal ICs, application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), printed circuit boards ( printed circuit board, PCB), electronic equipment, etc.
  • ICs integrated circuits
  • RFICs radio frequency integrated circuits
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • PCB printed circuit board
  • electronic equipment etc.
  • the communication device described in the above embodiments may be an access point or a station, but the scope of the communication device described in this application is not limited thereto, and the structure of the communication device may not be limited by FIG. 21 .
  • the communication apparatus may be a stand-alone device or may be part of a larger device.
  • the communication means may be:
  • a set with one or more ICs may also include a storage component for storing data and instructions;
  • ASIC such as modem (Modem);
  • Receivers smart terminals, wireless devices, handsets, mobile units, vehicle-mounted devices, cloud devices, artificial intelligence devices, etc.;
  • the communication device may be a chip or a chip system
  • the chip 700 shown in FIG. 22 includes a processor 701 and an interface 702 .
  • the number of processors 701 may be one or more, and the number of interfaces 702 may be multiple.
  • the interface 702 is used to execute the operation of S113 in FIG. 6; execute the operation of S123 in FIG. 15; execute the operation of S213 in FIG. 16; execute the operation of S223 in FIG. 17; execute the operation of S313 in FIG. 18; execute The operation of S413 in FIG. 19 .
  • the processor 701 is configured to perform the operation of S104 in FIG. 6 ; perform the operation of S124 in FIG. 15 ; perform the operation of S214 in FIG. 16 ; perform the operation of S224 in FIG. 17 ; perform the operation of S314 in FIG. 18 ; The operation of S414 in FIG. 19 is performed.
  • the interface 702 is used to execute the operation of S112 in FIG. 6; execute the operation of S122 in FIG. 15; execute the operation of S212 in FIG. 16; execute the operation of S222 in FIG. 17; execute the operation of S312 in FIG. 18; execute The operation of S412 in FIG. 19 .
  • the processor 701 is configured to perform the operation of S111 in FIG. 6 ; perform the operation of S121 in FIG. 15 ; perform the operation of S211 in FIG. 16 ; perform the operation of S221 in FIG. 17 ; perform the operation of S311 in FIG. 18 ; The operation of S411 in FIG. 19 is performed.
  • the chip can allocate MRUs to sites, which makes the allocation of MRUs more flexible and helps to improve frequency band utilization.
  • the frequency band range indication described in this application carries more information, which is conducive to saving the number of indexes required by the resource unit indication for indicating each MRU; or the chip performs the relevant operations in FIG. 19 , which can simplify the processing logic , reducing the processing burden of the site.
  • the chip further includes a memory 703 coupled to the processor 701, and the memory 703 is used for storing necessary program instructions and data of the terminal device.
  • the present application further provides a computer-readable storage medium on which a computer program is stored, and when the computer-readable storage medium is executed by a computer, implements the functions of any of the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the present application also provides a computer program product, which implements the functions of any of the above method embodiments when the computer program product is executed by a computer.
  • the above-mentioned embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software it can be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer instructions are loaded and executed on a computer, all or part of the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, special purpose computer, computer network, or other programmable device.
  • the computer instructions may be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer instructions may be downloaded from a website site, computer, server, or data center Transmission to another website site, computer, server, or data center by wire (eg, coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (eg, infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.).
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer or a data storage device such as a server, data center, etc. that includes an integration of one or more available media.
  • the available media may be magnetic media (eg, floppy disks, hard disks, magnetic tapes), optical media (eg, high-density digital video discs (DVDs)), or semiconductor media (eg, solid state disks, SSD)) etc.
  • the corresponding relationships shown in each table in this application may be configured or predefined.
  • the values of the information in each table are only examples, and can be configured with other values, which are not limited in this application.
  • the corresponding relationships shown in some rows may not be configured.
  • appropriate deformation adjustments can be made based on the above table, for example, splitting, merging, and so on.
  • the names of the parameters shown in the headings in the above tables may also adopt other names that can be understood by the communication device, and the values or representations of the parameters may also be other values or representations that the communication device can understand.
  • other data structures can also be used, such as arrays, queues, containers, stacks, linear lists, pointers, linked lists, trees, graphs, structures, classes, heaps, hash tables, or hash tables. Wait.
  • Predefined in this application may be understood as defining, predefining, storing, pre-storing, pre-negotiating, pre-configuring, curing, or pre-firing.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点。该方法中，触发帧中资源单元子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示站点被分配的MRU，频带范围指示用于指示该MRU中一个RU所在的频带范围，如资源单元指示用于指示该MRU中最小的RU所在的80MHz，从而使得频带范围指示不仅指示MRU相关的频带范围，还能够携带更多的信息，如最小的RU所在的频带范围。可见，本申请可应用于802.11ax，802.11be以及未来的WiFi系统中，与目前频带范围指示仅指示MRU相关的最低频带范围的方式相比，有利于节省资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数，从而节约系统信令开销。

Description

资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点
本申请要求于2020年09月04日提交中国专利局、申请号为202010923701.8、申请名称为“资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点”的中国专利申请的优先权；以及于2020年12月02日提交中国专利局、申请号为202011395419.3、申请名称为“资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点”的中国专利申请的优先权；以及于2021年01月05日提交中国专利局、申请号为202110009966.1、申请名称为“资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点”的中国专利申请的优先权；以上专利申请的全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点。
背景技术
传统的无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Network，WLAN)中，非接入点站点(non-access point station，non-AP STA)需要发送上行数据时会通过竞争的方式占用整个信道进行数据传输，大降低了频率的利用效率。为了改善该情况，在频域上将无线信道划分为多个子信道(子载波)，形成一个个资源单元(resource unit,RU)，用户数据承载在部分资源单元上，而不是占用整个信道，从而实现每个时间段内多个用户可同时并行传输，不必排队等待、相互竞争，提升了频率的利用效率。
在下行链路里，接入点(access point,AP)可根据各非接入点站点的下行数据的优先级来决定分配RU的情况，但在上行链路中，AP需要通过触发帧告知终端设备分配的资源单元。触发帧包括多个用户信息字段，一个用户信息字段包括一个站点需要读取的信息，如M个用户信息字段分别为非接入点站点1至非接入点站点M需要读取的信息。其中，在用户信息字段中资源单元分配子字段用于指示非接入点站点被分配到的资源单元。进而，非接入点站点可在分配的资源单元上发送数据分组。然而，由于有些非接入点站点所需发送的数据量较大，故所需分配的资源单元也较多，因此，如何利用资源单元分配子字段为对应的非接入点站点分配多个资源单元是一个亟待解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点，能够为对应的非接入点站点分配多个资源单元。
第一方面，本申请提供一种资源单元指示方法，该方法中，站点接收来自接入点的触发帧；该触发帧包括用于指示给所述站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示该MRU中最小的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；进而，站点可根据该资源单元指示和频带范围指示，确定被分配的MRU。
可见，该方法能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。另外，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是MRU中最小的RU所在的频带范围，相比于频带范围指示仅指示MRU相关的最低频带范围来说，本申请所述的频带范围指示携带了更多的信息，从而有利于节省资源单元指示用于指示各MRU所需的索引个数。
一种实施方式中，该资源单元指示方法中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的RU所在的80MHz。也即是说，频带范围指示所指示的MRU中最小的RU所在的频带范围的粒度是80MHz。该实施方式中，频带范围指示可获知MRU中最小的RU所在的80MHz的位置，这样，资源单元指示可在该条件下来指示对应的MRU，针对同样数量的MRU，有利于降低资源单元指示所需的索引数。
另一种实施方式中，该资源单元指示方法中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的RU所在的40MHz。也即是说，频带范围指示所指示的MRU中最小的RU所在的频带范围的粒度是40MHz。该实施方式中，频带范围指示可获知MRU中最小的RU所在的40MHz的位置，这样，资源单元指示可在该条件下来指示对应的MRU，针对同样数量的MRU，有利于降低资源单元指示所需的索引数。
其中，针对MRU中最小的RU为包括996个子载波的RU(996-tone RU)来说，频带范围指示所指示的40MHz可以是该996-tone RU覆盖下的两个40MHz中的其中一个，或预定义是该996-tone RU覆盖下的两个40MHz中频率最低的40MHz，或预定义是该996-tone RU覆盖下的两个40MHz中频率最高的40MHz。
另外，若MRU中最小的RU存在多个的情况，则频带范围指示可指示其中一个最小的RU所在的频带范围。
又一种实施方式中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的RU所在的160MHz。又一种实施方式中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的RU所在的240MHz。又一种实施方式中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的RU所在的320MHz。
本文中，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围实际是指在带宽中的哪一个频带范围，或该频带范围在带宽中的位置。例如，上述频带范围指示所指示的80MHz实际是带宽中的一个80MHz，或实际是该80MHz在带宽中的位置。
本申请中，MRU可包括但不限于以下几项：
资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括一个大小为26个子载波的资源单元(26-tone RU)和一个大小为52个子载波的资源单元(52-tone RU)，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是26-tone RU所在的频带范围；或
资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括一个大小为106个子载波的RU(106-tone RU)和一个26-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是26-tone RU所在的频带范围；或
资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括一个大小为484个子载波的资源单元(484-tone RU)和一个大小为242个子载波的资源单元(242-tone RU)，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是242-tone RU所在的频带范围；或
资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括一个大小为996个子载波的资源单元(996-tone RU)和一个484-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是484-tone RU所在的频带范围；或
资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括两个996-tone RU和一个484-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是484-tone RU所在的频带范围；或
资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括三个996-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是其中一个996-tone RU所在的频带范围；或
资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括三个996-tone RU和一个484-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是484-tone RU所在的频带范围；或
资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括一个996-tone RU、一个484-tone RU和一个242-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是242-tone RU所在的频带范围。
针对(3*996+484)-tone RU，采用本方面所述的资源单元指示方法，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是484-tone RU所在的80MHz，资源单元指示所指示的(3*996+484)-tone RU只需两个索引来分别指示484-tone RU在该80MHz中一个位置，即可告知站点被分配的(3*996+484)-tone RU；或者，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是484-tone RU所在的40MHz，资源单元指示所指示的(3*996+484)-tone RU只需1个索引即可告知站点被分配的(3*996+484)-tone RU。而采用频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(3*996+484)-tone RU相关的最低80MHz的资源单元指示方法，则资源单元指示还需分别指示8个索引，以分别告知站点被分配的(3*996+484)-tone RU。因此，该方面所述的资源单元指示方法有利于减少资源单元指示所需的索引个数。
第二方面，本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法，该资源单元指示方法是与第一方面所述的资源单元指示方法相对应的，是从接入点的角度进行阐述的。该方法中，接入点确定触发帧；触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；接入点发送该触发帧。
可见，该方法能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。另外，接入点需给站点分配MRU，可采用频带范围指示来指示MRU中最小的RU所在的频带范围，在该条件下再确定资源单元指示所需指示的索引，相比于频带范围指示仅指示MRU相关的最低频带范围来说，本申请所述的频带范围指示携带了更多的信息，如最小的RU所在的频带范围，从而有利于节省资源单元指示用于指示各MRU所需的索引个数。
该资源单元指示方法的其他相关实施方式可参见上述第一方面的相关实施方式，此处不再详述。
第三方面，本申请还提供了一种资源单元指示方法，该方法可包括：站点接收触发帧；触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给该站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示MRU所在的频带范围；站点根据频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
可见，该方法能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。
另外，站点根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示确定被分配的RU/MRU时，可根据资源单元指示确定被分配的MRU的大小，根据频带范围指示确定该RU/MRU所在的频带范围，进而在该频带范围内确定资源单元指示所指示的索引对应的RU/MRU。可见，该方法中资源单元指示可只需指示该频带范围中的RU/MRU，减少了资源单元指示为了指示该大小的MRU所需指示的索引个数。也就是说，该方法中频带范围指示可携带更多的信息，并尽可能的简化资源单元指示的逻辑，有利于降低站点的处理复杂度。
该资源单元指示方法中，站点可被分配的MRU包括但不限于以下几项：包括一个大小为26个子载波的资源单元(26-tone RU)和一个大小为52个子载波的资源单元(52-tone RU)的MRU(记为(52+26)-tone RU)；或包括一个大小为106个子载波的RU(106-tone RU)和一个26-tone RU的MRU(记为(106+26)-tone RU)；或包括一个大小为484个子载波的资源单 元(484-tone RU)和一个大小为242个子载波的资源单元的MRU(记为(484+242)-tone RU)；或包括一个大小为996个子载波的资源单元(996-tone RU)和一个484-tone RU的MRU(记为(996+484)-tone RU)；或包括两个996-tone RU和一个484-tone RU的MRU(记为(2*996+484)-tone RU)；或包括三个996-tone RU的MRU(记为3*996-tone RU)；或包括三个996-tone RU和一个484-tone RU的MRU(记为(3*996+484)-tone RU)；或包括一个996-tone RU、一个484-tone RU和一个242-tone RU的MRU(记为(996+484+242)-tone RU)。
该资源单元指示方法中，资源单元指示所指示的MRU所在的频带范围小于或等于80MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为带宽中的一个80MHz；
资源单元指示所指示的MRU所在的频带范围大于80MHz且小于或等于160MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为带宽中的一个160MHz；
资源单元指示所指示的MRU所在的频带范围大于160MHz且小于或等于240MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为带宽中的一个240MHz或320MHz；
资源单元指示所指示的MRU所在的频带范围大于240MHz且小于或等于320MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为带宽中的一个320MHz。
一种实施方式中，资源单元分配子字段占用9个比特；频带范围指示占用该9个比特中的比特0至比特1，资源单元指示占用比特2至比特8。
一种实施方式中，若带宽为320MHz，若频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为320MHz中的一个80MHz，则频带范围指示可采用比特0、比特1表示的四种状态，以分别指示320MHz中的四个80MHz；若频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为320MHz中频率最低的160MHz或频率最高的160MHz，则频带范围指示可采用比特0或比特1表示的两种状态，以分别指示320MHz中该两个160MHz；若频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为320MHz，则频带范围指示可不限定比特0、比特1的状态，以指示320MHz。
另一种实施方式中，若频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为320MHz中频率最低的240MHz或频率最高的240MHz，则频带范围指示可采用比特0或比特1表示的两种状态，以分别指示320MHz中该两个240MHz。
第四方面，本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法，该方法与第三方面所述的资源单元指示方法相对应，是从接入点的角度进行阐述的。该方面所述的资源单元指示方法包括：接入点确定触发帧；触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU；频带范围指示用于指示MRU所在的频带范围；接入点发送该触发帧。
可见，该方法能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。
另外，接入点给对应的站点分配MRU时，可利用频带范围指示来指示该MRU所在的频带范围，在此频带范围中再确定资源单元指示所需指示的索引，以告知站点被分配的MRU。可见，该方法中资源单元指示可只需指示该频带范围中的RU/MRU，减少了资源单元指示为了指示该大小的MRU所需指示的索引个数。也就是说，该方法中频带范围指示可携带更多的信息，还尽可能的简化了频带范围指示、资源单元指示的指示逻辑，有利于降低站点的处理复杂度。
该资源单元指示方法的其他相关实施方式可参见上述第三方面的相关实施方式，此处不再详述。
第五方面，本申请还提供了一种站点接收来自接入点的触发帧；触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示带宽中除该MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；站点根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
可见，该方法能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。另外，由于频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是除资源单元指示所指示的MRU之外的部分或全部RU所在的频带范围；或者，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是除资源单元指示所指示的MRU之外的频带范围，即资源单元指示所需指示的MRU是从小于带宽的频带范围中确定的，与资源单元指示所需指示的MRU是从带宽对应的频带范围中确定的相比，有利于降低资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数。
一种实施方式中，资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括三个大小为996个子载波的资源单元(996-tone RU)(记为3*996-tone RU)，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中除3*996-tone RU之外的一个996-tone RU所在的80MHz，或者频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中除3*996-tone RU之外的80MHz。可见，该实施方式中资源单元指示来指示3*996-tone RU时只需一个索引，站点即可结合该频带范围指示确定被分配的MRU。
而频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中3*996-tone RU相关的最低80MHz的情况，由于带宽中3*996-tone RU相关的最低80MHz确定后，3*996-tone RU的组合情况有三种(即从带宽中除该最低80MHz之外的三个80MHz选择两个996-tone RU，有三种组合)，因此资源单元指示需指示该三种组合对应的三个索引中的一个，才能唯一告知站点被分配的MRU。因此，本申请所述的频带范围指示的含义，有利于节省资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数。
第六方面，本申请还提供了一种资源单元指示方法，方法与上述第五方面所述的资源单元指示方法相对应，是从接入点的角度进行阐述的。该方法包括：接入点确定触发帧；触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示带宽中除MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；接入点发送触发帧。
可见，该方法能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。另外，由于频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是除资源单元指示所指示的MRU之外的部分或全部RU所在的频带范围；或者，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是除资源单元指示所指示的MRU之外的频带范围，即资源单元指示所需指示的MRU是从小于带宽的频带范围中确定的，与资源单元指示所需指示的MRU是从带宽对应的频带范围中确定的相比，有利于降低资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数。
该资源单元指示方法的其他相关实施方式可参见上述第五方面中的相关实施方式，此处不再详述。
第七方面，本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法，该方法包括：站点接收来自接入点的触发帧；触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；频带范围指示用于指示带宽中的一频带范围；资源单 元指示用于指示分配给站点的MRU，该MRU包括带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的频带范围外剩余的资源单元RU；站点根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
可见，该方法能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。另外，由于资源单元指示所指示的MRU是带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的频带范围之外剩余的RU组合的，与资源单元指示所需指示的MRU是从带宽对应的频带范围中确定的相比，有利于降低资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数。
一种实施方式中，资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括三个大小为996个子载波的资源单元(996-tone RU)(记为3*996-tone RU)，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中的一个80MHz，则该3*996-tone RU包括带宽中除80MHz之外的剩余三个996-tone RU。可见，该实施方式中资源单元指示来指示3*996-tone RU时需一个索引即可。与频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中3*996-tone RU相关的最低80MHz的情况相比，本申请有利于节省资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数。
第八方面，本申请还提供了一种资源单元指示方法，该方法与上述第七方面所述的资源单元指示方法相对应，从接入点的角度进行阐述的。该方法包括：接入点确定触发帧；触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；频带范围指示用于指示带宽中的一频带范围，资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的MRU，MRU包括带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的频带范围外剩余的资源单元RU；接入点发送该触发帧。
由于资源单元指示所指示的MRU是带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的频带范围之外剩余的RU组合的，与资源单元指示所需指示的MRU是从带宽对应的频带范围中确定的相比，有利于降低资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数。
该资源单元指示方法的其他相关实施方式可参见上述第七方面中的相关实施方式，此处不再详述。
另外，上述第一至八方面中，所述资源单元分配子字段占用N个比特，所述频率范围指示占用N个比特的比特个数基于所述带宽和所述频率范围指示所指示的频率范围确定。例如，频带范围指示占用比特0至比特x，所述资源单元指示占用比特x+1至比特N；x的值与带宽和频带范围指示所指示的频带范围有关；N和所述x均大于零。
第九方面，本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法，该方法包括：站点接收来自接入点的触发帧；触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段占用N个比特，N个比特指示的一个索引表示一个多资源单元MRU在带宽中的绝对位置；N大于零；站点确定该N个比特指示的索引对应的MRU，为站点被分配的MRU。
可见，该资源单元指示方法中，资源单元分配子字段中没有区分专门用于指示某个频带范围的比特，直接可根据资源单元分配子字段中N个比特所指示的索引，查找对应的MRU，从而大大简化了处理逻辑，有利于降低站点的处理复杂度。
一种实施方式中，N等于9。
该N个比特用于指示的MRU在带宽中的绝对位置，包括以下一项或多项：
包括320MHz中的第一个大小为996个子载波的资源单元(996-tone RU)和第二个996-tone RU的MRU，或者包括320MHz中的第三个996-tone RU和第四个996-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中的第一个至第四个996-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中任一个20MHz中第二个大小为52个子载波的资源单元(52-tone RU)和第二个大小为26个子载波的资源单元(26-tone RU)的MRU，或包括320MHz中任一个20MHz中第三个52-tone RU和第八个26-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中任一个20MHz中第二个52-tone RU和第五个26-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中任一个20MHz中第一个大小为106个子载波的资源单元(106-tone RU)和第五个26-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中任一个20MHz中第二个106-tone RU和第五个26-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中任一80MHz中第一个或第二个大小为242个子载波的资源单元(242-tone RU)与第二个大小为484个子载波的资源单元(484-tone RU)的MRU，或包括320MHz中任一80MHz中第三个或第四个242-tone RU与第一个484-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中任一160MHz中第一个或第二个484-tone RU与第二个大小为996个子载波的资源单元(996-tone RU)的MRU，或包括320MHz中任一160MHz中第三个或第四个484-tone RU与第二个996-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中频率最低的240MHz中第一个或第二个484-tone RU与第二个、第三个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最低的240MHz中第三个或第四个484-tone RU与第一个、第三个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最低的240MHz中第五个或第六个484-tone RU与第一个、第二个996-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中频率最高的240MHz中第一个或第二个484-tone RU与第二个、第三个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最高的240MHz中第三个或第四个484-tone RU与第一个、第三个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最高的240MHz中第五个或第六个484-tone RU与第一个、第二个996-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中第一个或第二个484-tone RU与第二个、第三个、第四个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中第三个或第四个484-tone RU与第一个、第三个、第四个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中第五个或第六个484-tone RU与第一个、第二个、第四个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中第七个或第八个484-tone RU与第一个、第二个、第三个996-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中其中三个996-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中频率最低的160MHz中第一个或第二个242-tone RU与第二个484-tone RU、第二个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最低的160MHz中第三个或第四个242-tone RU与第一个484-tone RU、第二个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最低的160MHz中第五个或第六个242-tone RU与第四个484-tone RU、第一个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最低的160MHz中第七个或第八个242-tone RU与第三个484-tone RU、第一个996-tone RU的MRU；或者，
包括320MHz中频率最高的160MHz中第一个或第二个242-tone RU与第二个484-tone RU、第二个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最高的160MHz中第三个或第四个242-tone RU与第一个484-tone RU、第二个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最高的160MHz中第五个或第六个242-tone RU与第四个484-tone RU、第一个996-tone RU的MRU，或包括320MHz中频率最高的160MHz中第七个或第八个242-tone RU与第三个484-tone RU、第一个996-tone RU的MRU。
第十方面，本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法，该方法与上述第九方面所述的资源单元指示方法相对应，是从接入点的角度进行阐述的。该方法包括：接入点确定触发帧；触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段占用N个比特，N个比特指示的一个索引直接表示一个多资源单元MRU在带宽中的绝对位置；N大于零；接入点发送该触发帧。
可见，该资源单元指示方法中，资源单元分配子字段中没有区分专门用于指示某个频带范围的比特，直接可根据资源单元分配子字段中N个比特所指示的索引，查找对应的MRU，从而大大简化了处理逻辑，有利于降低站点的处理复杂度。
该资源单元指示方法的其他相关实施方式可参见上述第九方面中的相关实施方式，此处不再详述。
第十一方面，本申请还提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置具有实现上述第一方面、第三方面、第五方面、第七方面、或第九方面所述的方法示例中站点的部分或全部功能，比如通信装置的功能可具备本申请中的部分或全部实施例中的功能，也可以具备单独实施本申请中的任一个实施例的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元或模块。
在一种可能的设计中，该通信装置的结构中可包括处理单元和通信单元，所述处理单元被配置为支持通信装置执行上述方法中相应的功能。所述通信单元用于支持通信装置与其他设备之间的通信。所述通信装置还可以包括存储单元，所述存储单元用于与处理单元和发送单元耦合，其保存通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。
一种实施方式中，通信装置实现第一方面中站点的相关功能，通信装置包括：
通信单元，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给所述站点的多资源单元MRU，所述频带范围指示用于指示所述资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；
处理单元，用于根据所述频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
作为示例，处理单元可以为处理器，通信单元可以为收发器或通信接口，存储单元可以为存储器。
另一种实施方式中，通信装置实现第三方面中站点的相关功能，通信装置包括：
通信单元，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给所述站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给所述站点的多资源单元MRU，所述频带范围指示用于指示所述MRU所在的频带范围；
处理单元，用于根据所述频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
又一种实施方式中，通信装置实现第五方面中站点的相关功能，通信装置包括：
通信单元，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给所述站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给所述站点的多资源单元MRU，所述频带范围指示用于指示带宽中除所述MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；
处理单元，用于根据所述频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
又一种实施方式中，通信装置实现第七方面中站点的相关功能，通信装置包括：
通信单元，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给所述站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述频带范围指示用于指示带宽中的一频带范围；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给所述站点的MRU，所述MRU包括所述带宽中除所述频带范围指示所指示的频带范围外剩余的资源单元RU；
处理单元，用于根据所述频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
在其他实施方式中，所述通信装置还可实现其他方面中站点的相关功能，此处不再详述。
一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第一方面中站点的相关功能，可包括：
收发器，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给所述站点的多资源单元MRU，所述频带范围指示用于指示所述资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；
处理器，用于根据所述频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
另一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第三方面中站点的相关功能，通信装置包括：
收发器，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给所述站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给所述站点的多资源单元MRU，所述频带范围指示用于指示所述MRU所在的频带范围；
处理器，用于根据所述频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
在其他实施方式中，所述通信装置还可实现其他方面中站点的相关功能，此处不再详述。
第十二方面，本申请还提供了一种通信装置，该通信装置具有实现上述第二方面、第四方面、第六方面、第八方面、或第十方面所述的方法示例中接入点的部分或全部功能，比如通信装置的功能可具备本申请中的部分或全部实施例中的功能，也可以具备单独实施本申请中的任一个实施例的功能。所述功能可以通过硬件实现，也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。所述硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的单元或模块。
在一种可能的设计中，该通信装置的结构中可包括处理单元和通信单元，所述处理单元被配置为支持通信装置执行上述方法中相应的功能。所述通信单元用于支持通信装置与其他设备之间的通信。所述通信装置还可以包括存储单元，所述存储单元用于与处理单元和发送单元耦合，其保存通信装置必要的程序指令和数据。
一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第二方面中接入点的相关功能，该通信装置包括：
处理单元，用于确定触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU，所述频带范围指示用于指示所述资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；
通信单元，用于发送所述触发帧。
另一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第四方面中接入点的相关功能，该通信装置包括：
处理单元，用于确定触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU；所述频带范围指示用于指示所述MRU所在的频带范围；
通信单元，用于发送所述触发帧。
另一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第六方面中接入点的相关功能，该通信装置包括：
处理单元，用于确定触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU，所述频带范围指示用于指示带宽中除所述MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；
通信单元，用于发送所述触发帧。
另一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第八方面中接入点的相关功能，该通信装置包括：
处理单元，用于确定触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述频带范围指示用于指示带宽中的一频带范围，所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的MRU，所述MRU包括所述带宽中除所述频带范围指示所指示的频带范围外剩余的资源单元RU；
通信单元，用于发送所述触发帧。
作为示例，处理单元可以为处理器，通信单元可以为收发器或通信接口，存储单元可以为存储器。
在其他实施方式中，所述通信装置还可实现其他方面中接入点的相关功能，此处不再详述。
一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第二方面中接入点的相关功能，可包括：
处理器，用于确定触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU，所述频带范围指示用于指示所述资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；
收发器，用于发送所述触发帧。
一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第四方面中接入点的相关功能，可包括：
处理器，用于确定触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU；所述频带范围指示用于指示所述MRU所在的频带范围；
收发器，用于发送所述触发帧。
另一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第六方面中接入点的相关功能，该通信装置包括：
处理器，用于确定触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU，所述频带范围指示用于指示带宽中除所述MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；
收发器，用于发送所述触发帧。
另一种实施方式中，所述通信装置实现第八方面中接入点的相关功能，该通信装置包括：
处理器，用于确定触发帧；
所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；所述频带范围指示用于指示带宽中的一频带范围，所述资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的MRU，所述MRU包括所述带宽中除所述频带范围指示所指示的频带范围外剩余的资源单元RU；
收发器，用于发送所述触发帧。
在其他实施方式中，所述通信装置还可实现其他方面中接入点的相关功能，此处不再详述。
在具体实现过程中，处理器可用于进行，例如但不限于，基带相关处理，收发器可用于进行，例如但不限于，射频收发。上述器件可以分别设置在彼此独立的芯片上，也可以至少部分的或者全部的设置在同一块芯片上。例如，处理器可以进一步划分为模拟基带处理器和数字基带处理器。其中，模拟基带处理器可以与收发器集成在同一块芯片上，数字基带处理器可以设置在独立的芯片上。随着集成电路技术的不断发展，可以在同一块芯片上集成的器件越来越多，例如，数字基带处理器可以与多种应用处理器(例如但不限于图形处理器，多媒体处理器等)集成在同一块芯片之上。这样的芯片可以称为系统芯片(system on chip)。将各个器件独立设置在不同的芯片上，还是整合设置在一个或者多个芯片上，往往取决于产品设计的具体需要。本发明实施例对上述器件的具体实现形式不做限定。
第十三方面，本申请还提供一种处理器，用于执行上述第一方面、第三方面、第五方面、第七方面、或第九方面的各种方法，或执行上述第二方面、第四方面、第六方面、第八方面、或第十方面的各种方法。在执行这些方法的过程中，上述方法中有关发送上述信息和接收上述信息的过程，可以理解为由处理器输出上述信息的过程，以及处理器接收输入的上述信息过程。具体来说，在输出上述信息时，处理器将该上述信息输出给收发器，以便由收发器进行发射。更进一步的，该上述信息在由处理器输出之后，还可能需要进行其他的处理，然后才到达收发器。类似的，处理器接收输入的上述信息时，收发器接收该上述信息，并将其输入处理器。更进一步的，在收发器收到该上述信息之后，该上述信息可能需要进行其他的处理，然后才输入处理器。
基于上述原理，举例来说，前述方法中提及的接收触发帧可以理解为处理器输入触发帧。又例如，发送触发帧可以理解为处理器输出触发帧。
如此一来，对于处理器所涉及的发射、发送和接收等操作，如果没有特殊说明，或者，如果未与其在相关描述中的实际作用或者内在逻辑相抵触，则均可以更加一般性的理解为处理器输出和接收、输入等操作，而不是直接由射频电路和天线所进行的发射、发送和接收操作。
在具体实现过程中，上述处理器可以是专门用于执行这些方法的处理器，也可以是执行存储器中的计算机指令来执行这些方法的处理器，例如通用处理器。上述存储器可以为非瞬时性(non-transitory)存储器，例如只读存储器(read only memory，ROM)，其可以与处理器集成在同一块芯片上，也可以分别设置在不同的芯片上，本申请实施例对存储器的类型以及存储器与处理器的设置方式不做限定。
第十四方面，本申请提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，用于储存为上述数据传输设备所 用的计算机软件指令，其包括用于执行上述方法的第一方面、第三方面、第五方面、第七方面、或第九方面所涉及的程序，或用于执行上述方法的第二方面、第四方面、第六方面、第八方面、或第十方面所涉及的程序。
第十五方面，本申请还提供了一种包括指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面、第三方面、第五方面、第七方面、或第九方面所述的方法，或使得计算机执行上述第二方面、第四方面、第六方面、第八方面、或第十方面所述的方法。
第十六方面，本申请提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器和接口，用于支持数据传输设备实现第一方面、第三方面、第五方面、第七方面、或第九方面所涉及的功能，例如，确定或处理上述方法中所涉及的数据和信息中的至少一种，如触发帧。在一种可能的设计中，所述芯片系统还包括存储器，所述存储器，用于保存站点必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统，可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。
第十七方面，本申请提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器和接口，用于支持数据传输设备实现第二方面、第四方面、第六方面、第八方面、或第十方面所涉及的功能，例如，确定或处理上述方法中所涉及的数据和信息中的至少一种。在一种可能的设计中，所述芯片系统还包括存储器，所述存储器，用于保存站点必要的程序指令和数据。该芯片系统，可以由芯片构成，也可以包括芯片和其他分立器件。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例提供的一种网络结构的示意图；
图2a是本申请实施例提供的一种160MHz的信道分布示意图；
图2b是本申请实施例提供的一种320MHz的信道分布示意图；
图3是本申请实施例提供的一种80MHz中子载波分布的示意图；
图4是本申请实施例提供的一种基于触发帧的上行传输示意图；
图5是本申请实施例提供的一种触发帧的帧结构示意图；
图6是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法110的流程示意图；
图7是本申请实施例提供的20MHz中(52+26)-tone RU的示意图；
图8是本申请实施例提供的20MHz中(106+26)-tone RU的示意图；
图9是本申请实施例提供的80MHz中(484+242)-tone RU的示意图；
图10是本申请实施例提供的160MHz中(996+484)-tone的示意图；
图11是本申请实施例提供的240MHz中(2*996+484)-tone RU的示意图；
图12是本申请实施例提供的320MHz中3*996-tone RU的示意图；
图13是本申请实施例提供的320MHz中(3*996+484)-tone RU的示意图；
图14是本申请实施例提供的80MHz中的(484+242)-tone RU的示意图；
图15是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法120的流程示意图；
图16是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法210的流程示意图；
图17是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法220的流程示意图；
图18是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法310的流程示意图；
图19是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法410的流程示意图；
图20是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置500的结构示意图；
图21为本申请实施例提供的另一种通信装置600的结构示意图；
图22是本申请实施例提供的一种芯片的结构示意图。
具体实施方式
下面结合附图对本申请实施例进行清楚、完整的描述。
以图1为例阐述本申请所述的资源单元指示方法可适用的网络结构。图1是本申请实施例提供的一种网络结构的示意图，该网络结构可包括一个或多个接入点(access point，AP)类的站点和一个或多个非接入点类的站点(none access point station，non-AP STA)。为便于描述，本文将接入点类型的站点称为接入点(AP)，非接入点类的站点称为站点(STA)。图1以该网络结构包括一个AP和两个站点(STA 1、STA 2)为例进行说明。
其中，接入点可以为终端设备(如手机)进入有线(或无线)网络的接入点，主要部署于家庭、大楼内部以及园区内部，典型覆盖半径为几十米至上百米，当然，也可以部署于户外。接入点相当于一个连接有线网和无线网的桥梁，主要作用是将各个无线网络客户端连接到一起，然后将无线网络接入以太网。具体的，接入点可以是带有无线保真(wreless-fidelity，WiFi)芯片的终端设备(如手机)或者网络设备(如路由器)。接入点可以为支持802.11be制式的设备。接入点也可以为支持802.11be、802.11ax、802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a等802.11家族的多种无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)制式的设备。本申请中的接入点可以是高效(high efficient,HE)AP或极高吞吐量(extramely high throughput,EHT)AP，还可以是适用未来某代WiFi标准的接入点。
站点可以为无线通讯芯片、无线传感器或无线通信终端等，也可称为用户。例如，站点可以为支持WiFi通讯功能的移动电话、支持WiFi通讯功能的平板电脑、支持WiFi通讯功能的机顶盒、支持WiFi通讯功能的智能电视、支持WiFi通讯功能的智能可穿戴设备、支持WiFi通讯功能的车载通信设备和支持WiFi通讯功能的计算机等等。可选地，站点可以支持802.11be制式。站点也可以支持802.11be、802.11ax、802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a等802.11家族的多种无线局域网(wireless local area networks，WLAN)制式。
本申请中的接入点可以是高效(high efficient,HE)STA或极高吞吐量(extramely high throughput,EHT)STA，还可以是适用未来某代WiFi标准的STA。
例如，接入点和站点可以是应用于车联网中的设备，物联网(IoT，internet of things)中的物联网节点、传感器等，智慧家居中的智能摄像头，智能遥控器，智能水表电表，以及智慧城市中的传感器等。
其中，802.11n还可称为高吞吐率(high throughput,HT)，802.11ac还可称为非常高吞吐率(very high throughput，VHT)，802.11ax(Wi-Fi 6)还可称为高效(high efficient，HE)，802.11be(Wi-Fi 7)还可称为极高吞吐率(extremely high throughput，EHT)，而对于HT之前的制式，如802.11a/b/g等统称叫做Non-HT(非高吞吐率)。其中，802.11b采用非OFDM(Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing，正交频分复用)模式。
WLAN从802.11a/g开始，历经802.11n、802.11ac，到现在正在讨论中的802.11ax和802.11be，其允许传输的带宽和空时流数分别如表1所示。
表1 WLAN的各个制式允许传输的最大带宽和最大传输速率
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000001
如表1所示，随着带宽增大，数据传输所支持的最大数据速率也随之增加。因此，未来 WiFi标准会考虑大于160MHz的更大带宽(如240MHz，320MHz)。
虽然本申请实施例主要以部署IEEE 802.11的网络为例进行说明，本领域技术人员容易理解，本申请涉及的各个方面可以扩展到采用各种标准或协议的其它网络，例如，BLUETOOTH(蓝牙)，高性能无线LAN(high performance radio LAN，HIPERLAN)(一种与IEEE 802.1 1标准类似的无线标准，主要在欧洲使用)以及广域网(WAN)、无线局域网(wireless local area network,WLAN)、个人区域网(personal area network,PAN)或其它现在已知或以后发展起来的网络。因此，无论使用的覆盖范围和无线接入协议如何，本申请提供的各种方面可以适用于任何合适的无线网络。
其次，为便于理解本申请实施例的相关内容，对本申请实施例涉及的一些概念进行阐述。
1、信道分布
一种实施方式中，带宽可划分为多个子信道，如图2a所示，图2a是本申请实施例提供的一种信道分布示意图，如图2a所示，该带宽为160MHz时可划分为主20MHz信道(或简称主信道，Primary 20MHz，P20)，从20MHz信道(Secondary 20MHz,S20)，从40MHz信道(Secondary 40MHz,S40)，从80MHz(Secondary 80MHz,S80)信道。一种可选的实施方式，信道1可对应主20MHz信道、信道2对应从20MHz信道、信道3和信道4合并为从40MHz信道、信道5至信道8合并为从80MHz信道。另外，主40MHz信道(或简称主信道，Primary40MHz，P40)为主20MHz信道所在的40MHz信道；主80MHz信道(或简称主信道，Primary80MHz，P80)为主20MHz信道所在的80MHz信道。
再例如，图2b是本申请实施例提供的另一种信道分布示意图，如图2b所示，该带宽为320MHz时可划分为主20MHz信道(或简称主信道，Primary 20MHz，P20)，从20MHz信道(Secondary 20MHz,S20)，从40MHz信道(Secondary 40MHz,S40)，从80MHz(Secondary 80MHz,S80)信道，从160MHz(Secondary160MHz,S160)信道。一种可选的实施方式，信道1可对应主20MHz信道、信道2对应从20MHz信道、信道3和信道4合并为从40MHz信道、信道5至信道8合并为从80MHz信道，信道9至信道16合并为从160MHz信道。另外，主40MHz信道(或简称主信道，Primary 40MHz，P40)为主20MHz信道所在的40MHz信道；主80MHz信道(或简称主信道，Primary 80MHz，P80)为主20MHz信道所在的80MHz信道；主160MHz信道(或简称主信道，Primary 160MHz，P160)为主20MHz信道所在的160MHz信道。
另一种实施方式中，带宽可划分为不同大小的资源单元(resource unit,RU)。不同大小的资源单元可由不同数量的子载波组合成。例如，包括(或大小为)996个子载波的资源单元(简称为996-tone RU)、包括(或大小为)484个子载波的资源单元(简称为484-tone RU)、包括(或大小为)484个子载波的资源单元(简称为484-tone RU)、包括(或大小为)106个子载波的资源单元(简称为106-tone RU)、包括(或大小为)26个子载波的资源单元(简称为26-tone RU)、包括(或大小为)52个子载波的资源单元(简称为52-tone RU)、包括(或大小为)2*996个子载波的资源单元(简称为2*996-tone RU，或者称为包括两个996-tone RU的996+996RU，或996+996MRU)、包括3*996个子载波的资源单元(简称为3*996-tone RU，或者称为包括三个996-tone RU的996+996+996RU，或996+996+996MRU)。
请参阅图3，图3是本申请实施例提供的一种80MHz中子载波分布的示意图。如图3所示，第一行表示80MHz可包括36个26-tone RU，第二行表示80MHz可包括16个52-tone RU，第三行表示80MHz可包括8个106-tone RU，第四行表示80MHz可包括4个242-tone RU，第五行表示80MHz可包括2个484-tone RU，其中，484L表示484-tone RU的左半部分，484R 表示484-tone RU的右半部分，两者分别包括242个子载波，是484-tone RU的另一种示意图。第六行表示80MHz可包括1个996-tone RU。此外，除了用于传输数据的RU，还可包括一些保护(guard)子载波，空子载波，或直流(direct current，DC)子载波，如图3所示。
针对160MHz的带宽或离散的80MHz+80MHz构成的160MHz带宽，可以看作两个图3所示的80MHz的子载波分布的复制组合，比如整个带宽可以包括一个2*996-tone RU，或可以包括26-tone RU，52-tone RU，106-tone RU，242-tone RU，484-tone RU，996-tone RU的各种组合。
针对240MHz的带宽或离散的160+80MHz构成的240MHz带宽，整个带宽可以看成三个图3所示的80MHz的子载波分布的复制组合，或可以包括26-tone RU，52-tone RU，106-tone RU，242-tone RU，484-tone RU，996-tone RU的各种组合。
针对320MHz的带宽或离散的160+160MHz构成的320MHz带宽，整个带宽可以看成四个图3所示的80MHz的子载波分布的复制组合，或可以包括26-tone RU，52-tone RU，106-tone RU，242-tone RU，484-tone RU，996-tone RU的各种组合。
以上的各种带宽的子载波分布，从左到右频率依次升高，如图3所示的左边可以看作最低频率，图3所示的右边可以看作最高频率。从左到右对资源单元进行标号，如第一个(1st)、第二个(2nd)、…、等。如图3所示，80MHz包括的4个242-tone RU，可以从左到右分别进行标号：第一个242-tone RU、第二个242-tone RU、第三个242-tone RU、第四个242-tone RU。其中，第一个242-tone RU、第二个242-tone RU与该80MHz内的频率最低的两个20MHz，按照频率从低到高一一对应；第三个242-tone RU、第四个242-tone RU与该80MHz内的频率最高的两个20MHz，按照频率从低到高一一对应。由于每80MHz存在一个中间26-tone RU，故上述242-tone RU与其对应的20MHz在频率上并不是完全重合。
除了上边提到的几种RU，802.11be还引入了由多个上述大小的RU组合获得的多资源单元(multi-RU，MRU)。例如，802.11be还引入了包括一个52-tone RU和一个26-tone RU的(52+26)-tone RU(或简称为(52+26)-tone MRU，或简称为78-tone RU)，包括一个106-tone RU和一个26-tone RU的(106+26)-tone RU(或简称为(106+26)-tone MRU，或简称为132-tone RU)；包括一个484-tone RU和一个242-tone RU的(484+242)-tone RU(或简称为(484+242)-tone MRU，或简称为726-tone RU)，包括一个996-tone RU和一个484-tone RU的(996+484)-tone RU(或简称为(996+484)-tone MRU，或简称为1480-tone RU)；包括两个996-tone RU和一个484-tone RU的(2*996+484)-tone RU(或简称为(2*996+484)-tone MRU，或简称为2476-tone RU)；包括3个996-tone RU的3*996-tone RU(或简称为3*996-tone MRU，或简称为2988-tone RU)；包括3个996-tone RU和一个484-tone RU的(3*996+484)-tone RU(或简称为(3*996+484)-tone MRU，或简称为3472-tone RU)；包括一个996-tone RU、一个484-tone RU和一个242-tone RU的(996+484+242)-tone RU(或简称为(996+484+242)-tone MRU，或简称为1722-tone RU)。
其中，26-tone RU大约对应2MHz,52-tone RU大约对应4MHz,106-tone RU大约对应8MHz。242-tone RU大约对应20MHz。其他RU的尺寸可以相应做加法或者乘法，这里不再赘述。
其中，接入点为站点分配多个RU，可称作为站点分配MRU。该MRU包括多个RU，或合并的多个资源单元，或组合的多个资源单元，或由多个资源单元组合的。若不特别说明，本文中，“合并”、“组合”、“由…组合的”代表相同的含义。可选的，由多个RU组成的MRU也可包括部分直流子载波、空子载波等。
2、基于触发帧的调度式上行传输方法
通常，STA通过信道竞争获得发送权之后再进行上行数据传输的，比如基于EDCA(enhanced distributed channel access，加强分布式信道接入)方式抢信道。802.11ax引入了基于触发帧的调度式上行传输方法。其中，基于触发帧的调度式上行传输示意图如图4所示，图4是本申请实施例提供的一种基于触发帧的上行传输示意图。接入点发送触发帧，该触发帧中包含用于一个或多个站点发送上行子物理层协议数据单元(physical layer protocol data unit，PPDU)的资源调度以及其他参数；站点接收到触发帧后，从中解析出与自己的关联标识相匹配(或相同)的用户信息字段，然后在该用户信息字段中的资源单元分配子字段所指示的一个RU或MRU上发送高效基于触发的数据分组(high efficient trigger based physical layer protocol data unit，HE TB PPDU)，即EHT TB PPDU是EHT PPDU中的一种；接入点接收到一个或多个站点发送的上行子PPDU组成的上行多用户PPDU后，回复确认帧。其中，接入点给一个或多个站点发送的确认帧可通过下行OFDMA形式发送，也可以通过non-HT复制传输形式发送。确认帧包括确认(Ack)帧，块确认(Block Ack)帧。其中，Block Ack帧包括压缩Block Ack帧和多站点块确认(Multi-STA Block Ack)帧。其中，Ack帧，Block Ack帧是为一个站点发送的上行子PPDU的确认，Multi-STA Block Ack是为一个或多个站点发送的上行子PPDU的确认。
一种实现中，该触发帧的帧格式可如图5所示，图5是本申请实施例提供的一种触发帧的结构示意图，该触发帧中可只包括图5所示的部分字段，或触发帧中包括的字段可多于图5所示的字段，本申请实施例不做限定。例如，该触发帧包括公共信息(common info)字段和用户信息列表(user info list)字段。该触发帧还可以包括帧控制(frame control)字段、时长(duration)字段、接收地址(RA)字段、发送地址(TA)字段、填充(padding)字段和帧校验序列(FCS，frame check sequence)字段等。
其中，公共信息字段也可以称为公共域或公共信息域。该公共信息字段包括触发帧类型(trigger type)子字段、长度(length)子字段、级联指示(cascade indication)子字段、需要载波侦听(CS Required)子字段、带宽(bandwidth)子字段、保护间隔+长训练序列(GI+LTF)子字段、基于触发帧类型的公共信息(trigger dependent common info)子字段等需要所有站点读取的公共信息。
其中，用户信息列表字段也可称为用户信息列表域、逐个站点域等。用户信息列表字段包括一个或多个用户信息(user info)字段，每个用户信息字段包括每个站点需要读取的信息，如关联标识(Association Identifier，AID)子字段、资源单元分配(RU allocation)子字段以及编码类型(coding type)子字段、调制编码策略(Modulation and Coding Scheme，MCS)子字段、预留(reserved)子字段、基于触发帧类型的用户信息(trigger dependent user info)子字段等。
其中，关联标识字段用于指示该用户信息字段所对应的站点的关联标识；资源单元分配子字段用于指示为站点分配的RU/MRU(或RU/MRU的位置)。
其中，本文所述的“字段(field)”也可称为“域”、“信息”等，“子字段(subfield)”可称为“子域”、“信息”等。
站点在分配的RU/MRU上发送的PPDU还可为极高吞吐率基于触发的物理层协议数据单元(Extremely High Throughput trigger based physical layer protocol data unit，EHT TB PPDU)。其中，该PPDU的各个字段的作用如表2所示。应理解，此处仅为举例，在标准制定或实际实现中，EHT PPDU还可以包括其他的字段。
表2 PPDU的各个字段的作用
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000002
随着无线局域网的发展，站点进行上行数据传输需求的数据速率也随之增加。接入点如何给站点分配多个资源单元并向站点进行指示，从而使得站点可利用多个资源单元进行上行数据传输，改善数据速率，成为一个亟待解决的问题。
本申请提供一种资源单元指示方法，该方法中，接入点能够为站点分别分配MRU。其中，该资源单元指示方法也可以称为多资源单元指示方法或多资源单元的合并方法等。本申请实施例采用触发帧为站点分配MRU，通过对触发帧中资源单元分配子字段进行设计，以满足320MHz中RU/MRU的分配。本申请实施例设计的触发帧适用于802.11be(EHT)以及未来的WiFi系统中，上行传输带宽大，站点被分配的上行传输资源块种类变多的情况。
其中，每个站点对应一个资源单元分配子字段。该资源单元分配子字段分为两部分，第一部分的比特用于告知站点一定的频带范围，第二部分的比特在该频带范围的基础上对MRU的条目进行告知。该条目是索引表中的索引或索引对应的RU、MRU，第二部分的比特能够指示该索引表中的RU、MRU。为描述方便起见，第一部分的比特可称为频带范围指示，第二部分的比特可称为资源单元指示，在标准制定或实际实现中，只要符合第一部分比特和第二部分比特的功能，则属于本申请实施例涉及的范围，本申请实施例对第一部分比特和第二部分比特的名称不做限定。
应理解，本申请实施例所称的MRU中一个RU所在的频率范围，与该RU实际覆盖频率范围可以不同，也可以相同。本实施例缩成的RU所在的频率范围，可以比RU实际覆盖频率范围大，或者小，或者两者相同。
RU实际覆盖频率范围比起所占的频率范围小，例如，一个大小为484-tone的RU，其实际覆盖的频率范围是40MHz，该40MHz在320MHz中的第二个80MHz，以80MHz为粒度 描述RU所在的频率范围时可以称为该484-tone RU所在的频率范围是320MHz内第二个80MHz；
RU实际覆盖频率范围与所占的频率范围相同或相等，例如，一个大小为484-tone的RU，其覆盖的真实频率范围是40MHz，该40MHz在320MHz中的第三个40MHz，以40MHz为粒度描述RU所在的频率范围时，可以称该484-tone RU所在的频率范围是320MHz内第三个40MHz；
RU实际覆盖频率范围与所占的频率范围相同或相等，再如，一个大小为996-tone的RU，其覆盖的真实频率范围是80MHz，该80MHz在320MHz中的第二个80MHz，以80MHz为粒度描述RU所在的频率范围时，可以称该996-tone RU所在的频率范围是320MHz内第二个80MHz；
RU实际覆盖频率范围比起所占的频率范围大，例如，一个大小为996-tone的RU，其覆盖的真实频率范围是80MHz，该80MHz在320MHz中的第二个80MHz，以40MHz为粒度描述RU所在的频率范围时，可以称该996-tone RU所在的频率范围是320MHz内第三个(或第四个)40MHz。
其中，针对MRU，频带范围指示与频带范围之间可包括以下任一方面所述的关系：
第一方面，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小RU所在的频带范围。
也就是说，资源单元指示用于指示分配给站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的RU所在的频带范围；从而，站点根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
另一种实现方式中，资源单元指示用于指示分配给站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的MRU中一个RU所在的频带范围；站点根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。MRU中一个RU可以是如上所述的MRU中的最小的RU，或MRU中的最大的RU，或MRU中预设大小的RU。以下实施例以最小的RU为例，进行阐述。该实施方式中频带范围指示不仅可指示一频带范围，且该频带范围是MRU中一个RU所在的频带范围，从而有利于资源单元指示在相同的比特数的情况下能够指示更多个MRU条目，或有利于资源单元指示在需指示相同数量的MRU条目时，所需的索引数更少，可预留更多的索引以便于指示其他信息。
其中，频带范围指示用于指示的MRU中一个RU所在的频带范围的粒度可以是40MHz、80MHz、160MHz、240MHz或320MHz。即一种实施例中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中一个RU所在的80MHz。另一种实施例中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中一个RU所在的40MHz。又一种实施例中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中一个RU所在的160MHz。又一种实施例中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中一个RU所在的240MHz。又一种实施例中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中一个RU所在的320MHz。
本申请中，资源单元指示方法110以频带范围指示用于指示MRU中一个RU所在的80MHz为例阐述；资源单元指示方法120以频带范围指示用于指示MRU中一个RU所在的40MHz为例阐述。针对其他频带范围的粒度，为避免冗余不再阐述，但相关的实施例本领域技术人员可基于该实施方式、资源单元指示方法110、资源单元指示方法120获得。
第二方面，频带范围指示用于指示带宽中与MRU不相关的频带范围。
一种实施方式中，资源单元指示用于指示分配给站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示带宽中除MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；进而，站点根 据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
另一种实施方式中，频带范围指示用于指示带宽中的一频带范围；资源单元指示用于指示分配给站点的MRU，MRU包括带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的频带范围外剩余的资源单元RU；站点根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
可见，该实施方式中频带范围指示不仅指示一频带范围，而且该频带范围是资源单元指示所指示的MRU不相关的频带范围，从而有利于站点获知带宽中MRU相关的频带范围，同样有利于资源单元指示在相同的比特数的情况下能够指示更多个MRU条目，或有利于资源单元指示在需指示相同数量的MRU条目时，所需的索引数更少，可预留更多的索引以便于指示其他信息。
本申请中，资源单元指示方法210以“频带范围指示用于指示带宽中除MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围”为例阐述；资源单元指示方法220以“MRU包括带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的频带范围外剩余的资源单元RU”为例阐述。
第三方面，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围可变，与资源单元指示所指示的MRU的类型有关。
频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度与资源单元指示所指示的MRU有关。可选的，频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的MRU所在的频带范围，故频带范围指示所指示的频带范围可变，不是如上述第一方面所述的固定的频带范围的粒度。
该实施方式中，频带范围指示能够指示资源单元指示所指示的MRU所在的频带范围，从而有利于站点获知带宽中MRU所在的频带范围，同样有利于资源单元指示在相同的比特数的情况下能够指示更多个MRU条目，或有利于资源单元指示在需指示相同数量的MRU条目时，所需的索引数更少，可预留更多的索引以便于指示其他信息。
本申请中，资源单元指示方法310以“频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的MRU所在的频带范围”为例阐述。
可见，上述三个方面所述的资源单元指示方法中，站点接收到对应的资源单元分配子字段时，可通过读取第一部分的比特和第二部分的比特获知MRU，如MRU的位置等信息。
本申请还提供第四方面的资源单元指示方法，该方面中，第一部分的比特与第二部分的比特可融合为一个部分进行指示，换句话说，指示分配给站点的资源单元时，资源单元分配子字段采用整体的比特进行指示，不再区分用于指示频率范围的第一部分比特和指示资源单元的第二部分比特。例如，站点对应的资源单元分配子字段占用N个比特，该N个比特指示的一个索引直接表示一个RU或一个多资源单元MRU在带宽中的绝对位置，进而站点可根据该N个比特指示的索引，直接查表获知被分配的RU/MRU。因此，本申请中，资源单元指示方法401以“该N个比特指示的一个索引直接表示一个RU或一个多资源单元MRU在带宽中的绝对位置”为例阐述。
以下结合附图对资源单元指示方法110、资源单元指示方法120、资源单元指示方法210、资源单元指示方法220、资源单元指示方法310、资源单元指示方法410分别进行阐述。
实施例一，该实施例一主要描述资源单元指示方法110。
请参阅图6，图6是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法110的流程示意图，如图6所示，该资源单元指示方法110可包括但不限于以下步骤：
S111、接入点确定触发帧；
触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包 括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的资源单元RU所在的80MHz。
S112、接入点发送触发帧；
S113、站点接收来自接入点的触发帧；
S114、站点根据频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
一种实现方式中，步骤S114中站点根据频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU，包括：站点确定频带范围指示所指示的80MHz(即该频带范围指示可指示频带范围的大小是80MHz且在带宽中的位置)，可获知资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的RU在该80MHz中，进而结合资源单元指示的索引获知被分配的MRU。
例如，资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(52+26)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(52+26)-tone RU中26-tone RU所在的80MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(106+26)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(106+26)-tone RU中26-tone RU所在的80MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(484+242)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(484+242)-tone RU中242-tone RU所在的80MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(996+484)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的80MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(2*996+484)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(2*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的80MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是3*996-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是3*996-tone RU中一个996-tone RU所在的80MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(3*996+484)-tone RU，所述频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(3*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的80MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(996+484+242)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(996+484+242)-tone RU中242-tone RU所在的80MHz。
假设资源单元分配子字段有9个比特，频带范围指示为资源单元分配子字段中的第一个、第二个比特，记为B0、B1。那么，B0、B1指示320MHz中的一个80MHz。假设如表3所示，表3是频带范围指示(B0、B1)需指示的各80MHz，以表示资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小RU所在的80MHz。其中，320MHz中的各80MHz频带范围，按照频率从低到高依次称为第一个80MHz、第二个80MHz、第三个80MHz、第四个80MHz。
如表3所示，B0B1为00，表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的第一个80MHz；B0B1为01，表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的第二个80MHz；B0B1为10，表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的第三个80MHz；B0B1为11，表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的第四个80MHz。
表3频带范围指示(B0、B1)需指示的各频带范围
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000003
资源单元指示为资源单元分配子字段中的第三个至第九个比特，记为B2至B8。那么，结合频带范围指示以及所需指示的各RU或MRU，资源单元指示需指示的RU或MRU可如 表4所示。表4中第一列是B2至B8的值，可称为资源单元指示所指示的索引；表4中第二列表示各索引所对应的资源单元大小；表4中第三列表示各资源单元大小对应的索引个数，即条目数。其中，表4中每个索引可结合频带范围指示确定对应的RU或MRU。
表4资源单元指示(B2至B8)需指示的条目
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000004
如图3所示，80MHz中26-tone RU具有36个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指示的80MHz的基础上，通过指示表4所示的索引0至35中的一个，以指示对应的该80MHz中一个26-tone RU。
可选的，由于802.11ax中，80MHz中26-tone RU具有37个位置，故802.11ax中资源单元指示所对应的表格中指示26-tone RU的索引个数是37个，即索引0至36。因此，本申请为了更好的兼容802.11ax的设备，可将表4中索引36预留，而不用于指示52-tone RU，即从索引37开始用于指示其他的RU/MRU。这样，有利于802.11ax的设备可继续读懂本申请实施例所述的表4的相关条目，以使本申请实施例提供的技术方案与已有标准进行兼容。
如图3所示，80MHz中52-tone RU具有16个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指示的80MHz的基础上，通过指示如表4所示的索引36至51中的一索引，以指示对应的该80MHz中一个52-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中106-tone RU具有8个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指 示的80MHz的基础上，通过指示如表4所示的索引52至59中的一索引，以指示对应的该80MHz中一个52-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中242-tone RU具有4个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指示的80MHz的基础上，通过指示如表4所示的索引60至63中的一索引，以指示对应的该80MHz中一个242-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中484-tone RU具有2个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指示的80MHz的基础上，通过指示如表4所示的索引64至65中的一索引，以指示对应的该80MHz中一个484-tone RU。
频带范围指示可指示996-tone RU所在的80MHz，故资源单元指示只需一个索引66指示996-tone RU。相应的，站点根据频带范围指示确定MRU中最小RU所在的80MHz，再结合资源单元指示所指示的索引66对应的RU size是996-tone RU，故站点可获知该80MHz对应的996-tone RU为被分配的RU。
以上是单个RU的指示方式，以下将描述MRU的指示方式。其中，本文图7至图14所示的各种MRU的示意图中，针对每个附图中的每个MRU，MRU包括竖线填充的RU。即竖线填充的RU表示MRU中包括的RU。例如，图7所示的三个(26+52)-tone RU中，第一行所示的(26+52)-tone RU包括竖线填充的第二个26-tone RU和竖线填充的第二个52-tone RU。另外，本文中，“*”与“×”所表示的含义相同，不做区分。例如，2*996-tone RU可表示为2×996-tone RU。
由于2*996-tone RU不能横跨两个160MHz，即2*996-tone RU所在的频带范围只能是主160MHz或从160MHz，故频带范围指示可指示2*996-tone RU中一个996-tone RU所在的80MHz，即可获知2*996-tone RU中另一个996-tone RU的位置，故资源单元指示只需一个索引67即可结合频带范围指示来指示2*996-tone RU。相应的，站点根据频带范围指示确定MRU中最小RU所在的80MHz，再结合资源单元指示所指示的索引，例如67对应的RU size是2*996-tone RU，故站点可获知该80MHz所在的主160MHz或从160MHz是被分配的2*996-tone RU。
320MHz中4*996-tone RU只有一个，故资源单元指示可指示一个索引68，即可使得站点获知被分配的RU是4*996-tone RU。
20MHz中(52+26)-tone RU具有如图7所示的三种组合，分别是：包括20MHz中第二个52-tone RU和第二个26-tone RU的(52+26)-tone RU，包括20MHz中第二个52-tone RU和第五个26-tone RU的(52+26)-tone RU，包括第三个52-tone RU和第八个26-tone RU的(52+26)-tone RU。由于(52+26)-tone RU不能跨20MHz组合，因此，80MHz中(52+26)-tone RU具有12(即4*3)种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的26-tone RU所在的80MHz的基础上，资源单元指示还需指示索引69至索引80中的一个，以指示对应的该80MHz中的一种(52+26)-tone RU。索引69至索引80中各索引与该12种(52+26)-tone RU中每种(52+26)-tone RU的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该12种(52+26)-tone RU的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
20MHz中(106+26)-tone RU具有如图8所示的两种组合，分别是：包括20MHz中第一个106-tone RU和第五个26-tone RU的(106+26)-tone RU，包括20MHz中第二个106-tone RU和第五个26-tone RU的(106+26)-tone RU。因此，80MHz中(106+26)-tone RU具有8(即4*2)种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的26-tone RU所在的80MHz的基础上，资源单元指示还需指示索引81至索引88中的一个，以指示对应的该80MHz中的一种(106+26)-tone RU。 其中，索引81至索引88中各索引与该8种(106+26)-tone RU中每种(106+26)-tone RU的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该8种(106+26)-tone RU的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
80MHz中(484+242)-tone RU具有如图9所示的四种组合，分别是：包括80MHz中第二个484-tone RU和第一个242-tone RU的(484+242)-tone RU，包括80MHz中第二个484-tone RU和第二个242-tone RU的(484+242)-tone RU，包括80MHz中第一个484-tone RU和第三个242-tone RU的(484+242)-tone RU，包括80MHz中第一个484-tone RU和第四个242-tone RU的(484+242)-tone RU。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的242-tone RU所在的80MHz的基础上，资源单元指示还需指示索引89至索引92中的一个，以指示对应的该80MHz中的一种(484+242)-tone RU。其中，索引89至索引92中各索引与该4种(484+242)-tone RU中每种(484+242)-tone RU的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该4种(484+242)-tone RU的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
由于(996+484)-tone RU可位于主160MHz内或从160MHz内，160MHz中(996+484)-tone RU具有如图10所示的四种组合，分别是：包括160MHz中第一个484-tone RU和第二个996-tone RU(996+484)-tone RU，包括160MHz中第二个484-tone RU和第二个996-tone RU(996+484)-tone RU，包括160MHz中第三个484-tone RU和第一个996-tone RU(996+484)-tone RU，包括160MHz中第四个484-tone RU和第一个996-tone RU(996+484)-tone RU。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的484-tone RU所在的80MHz的基础上，站点可直接获知(996+484)-tone RU中996-tone RU所在的位置，故资源单元指示还需指示索引93至索引94中的一个，以指示(996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU在该80MHz中的位置。该484-tone RU在该80MHz中的位置有两个，因此，资源单元指示对应两个条目。
这样，对于接入点侧，频带范围指示可指示(996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的80MHz，资源单元指示可指示索引93或索引94。相应的，站点接收到该资源单元分配子字段后，可根据该频带范围指示所指示的80MHz，结合资源单元指示所指示的索引值对应的484-tone RU在该80MHz中的位置，确定被分配的(996+484)-tone RU。
例如，假设索引93对应频率范围指示所指示的80MHz中的第一个484-tone RU，索引94对应频率范围指示所指示的80MHz中的第二个484-tone RU，且假设图10中所示的160MHz是320MHz中的主160MHz。这样，结合表3和表4，图10中第一行第一个(996+484)-tone RU对应的资源单元分配子字段中，频率范围指示为00，资源单元指示为93；图10中第一行第二个(996+484)-tone RU对应的资源单元分配子字段中，频率范围指示为00，资源单元指示为94；图10中第二行第一个(996+484)-tone RU对应的资源单元分配子字段中，频率范围指示为01，资源单元指示为93；图10中第二行第二个(996+484)-tone RU对应的资源单元分配子字段中，频率范围指示为01，资源单元指示为94。
由于(2*996+484)-tone RU属于240MHz传输，只能存在于将320MHz中频率最低或最高的80MHz打孔形成的240MHz中，240MHz中(2*996+484)-tone RU具有如图11所示的六种组合，分别是：包括240MHz中第一个484-tone RU和第二个、第三个996-tone RU的(2*996+484)-tone RU，包括240MHz中第二个484-tone RU和第二个、第三个996-tone RU的(2*996+484)-tone RU，包括240MHz中第三个484-tone RU和第一个、第三个996-tone RU的(2*996+484)-tone RU，包括240MHz中第四个484-tone RU和第一个、第三个996-tone RU的(2*996+484)-tone RU，包括240MHz中第五个484-tone RU和第一个、第二个996-tone RU的(2*996+484)-tone RU，包括240MHz中第六个484-tone RU和第一个、第二个996-tone RU的(2*996+484)-tone RU。在频带范围指示所指示的(2*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的 80MHz的基础上，(2*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU在该80MHz中的位置有两种可能以及(2*996+484)-tone RU所在的240MHz的位置也有两种可能，因此，资源单元指示还需指示索引95至索引98，以指示对应的(2*996+484)-tone RU的位置。
另一种实施方式中，在频带范围指示所指示的(2*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的80MHz的基础上，(2*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU在该80MHz中的位置有两种可能以及(2*996+484)-tone RU所在的240MHz的位置也有三种可能，因此，资源单元指示还需指示索引95至索引100，以指示对应的(2*996+484)-tone RU的位置。
320MHz中(3*996)-tone RU具有如图12所示的四种组合，分别是：320MHz中的第二至第四个996-tone RU组合的，320MHz中的第一个、第三个至第四个996-tone RU组合的，320MHz中的第一至第二、第四个996-tone RU组合的，320MHz中的第一至第三个996-tone RU组合的。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的996-tone RU所在的80MHz的基础上，320MHz中(3*996)-tone RU中其余两个996-tone RU有三种选择，故资源单元指示还需指示索引99至索引101中的一个，以指示320MHz中与该80MHz组合的其余两个996-tone RU的一中位置。其中，索引99至索引101中各索引与其余两个996-tone RU的三种选择中的一种的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该三种(3*996)-tone RU的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
例如，资源单元指示所指示的MRU的大小是(3*996)-tone RU，且资源单元指示所指示的索引的大小，与该(3*996)-tone RU的可选组合的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。假设接入点为站点分配如图12所示的第一行所示的(3*996)-tone RU时，则结合表3可知，需将该站点对应的B0B1设置为01；假设表4中索引99对应图12中第三行所示的(3*996)-tone RU、索引100对应图12中第二行所示的(3*996)-tone RU、索引101对应图12中第一行所示的(3*996)-tone RU，那么需将B2至B8设置为101；进而，站点获知B2至B8指示的索引对应的RU大小是(3*996)-tone RU，且B2至B8的索引101，且B0B1指示该(3*996)-tone RU中一个996-tone RU是320MHz中的第二个996-tone RU，进而站点可获知被分配的(3*996)-tone RU是图12第一行所示的(3*996)-tone RU。
320MHz中(3*996+484)-tone RU具有如图13所示的八种组合，分别是：320MHz中八个484-tone RU中一个484-tone RU与该484-tone RU所在的80MHz之外的其余三个996-tone RU的组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的484-tone RU所在的80MHz的基础上，320MHz中其余三个996-tone RU只有一种选择，但484-tone RU在80MHz中的位置有两种，故资源单元指示还需指示索引102至索引103中的一个，以指示484-tone RU在80MHz中的一种位置。其中，索引102至索引103中各索引与484-tone RU在80MHz中的两种位置的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该484-tone RU在80MHz中的两种位置的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
160MHz中一个80MHz中的(484+242)-tone RU具有如图14所示的四种组合，故160MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU具有八种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的242-tone RU所在的80MHz的基础上，160MHz中该80MHz之外的996-tone RU只有一种选择，但242-tone RU在80MHz中的位置有四种，故资源单元指示还需指示索引104至索引107中的一个，以指示242-tone RU在80MHz中的一种位置。其中，索引104至索引107中各索引与242-tone RU在80MHz中的四种位置的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该242-tone RU在80MHz中的四种位置的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
可见，经过上述分析可知，由于频带范围指示所指示的频带范围还能够告知MRU中最小的RU所在的频带范围，从而有利于资源单元指示采用更少的索引来分别指示MRU的各 种可能的位置。如针对(996+484+242)-tone RU的八种组合，如表4所示，资源单元指示只需四个索引即可分别指示每种组合。再如针对(3*996+484)-tone RU的八种组合，如表4所示，资源单元指示只需两个索引即可分别指示每种组合。
相比于频带范围指示仅指示MRU相关的最低80MHz的方式，该资源单元指示方法101中频带范围指示可携带更多的信息，即可携带MRU中最小的RU所在的80MHz。例如，若频带范围指示仅指示MRU相关的最低80MHz，那么针对图10所示的(996+484)-tone RU的四种组合，资源单元指示需要四个索引来分别指示每种组合；若频带范围指示用于指示的是MRU中最小的RU所在的80MHz，如表4所示，资源单元指示只需要两个索引即可指示每种(996+484)-tone RU的组合。因此，该资源单元指示方法101中频带范围指示可携带更多的信息，有利于资源单元指示采用更少的索引来分别指示MRU的各种可能的位置。
本申请实施例还提供一种技术方案，涉及触发帧(Trigger frame)中的用户信息字段(User Info field)中的资源单元分配子字段(RU Allocation subfield)的又一种设计。如上述实施例所述，RU Allocation subfield采用9个比特的设计，具体为7比特的资源单元指示+2比特的频带范围指示的形式实现，其中2比特为频带范围指示，其用于指示某个80MHz位置，另外7比特的资源单元指示用于指示2比特确定了某个80MHz情况下的RU/MRU的具体位置。
例如表3所示该2比特用于指示绝对频率下的某个80MHz位置，其中，00指示最低频率80MHz，01指示次低频率80MHz，10指示次高频率80MHz，11指示最高频率80MHz。
为便于接收设备更好地识别对应的用户信息字段为HE/EHT用户信息字段，以及便于在用户信息字段中与前代设备(11ax)相兼容等原因，提出一种采用7比特+2比特模式，其中的2比特采用主从位置的指示方法，其中2比特指示的是RU/MRU中一个最小RU所在80MHz中的位置。
在上述情况下，当使用80MHz主从位置的指示方法时，RU Allocation subfield可以有如下几种具体的设计：
下面进一步介绍采用主从位置指示方法的好处：主从指示法下的两比特这里用BS和B0来表示(也可以用其他字母表示，例如前述实施例中的B0B1，这里仅为举例)，其中B可以理解为比特，S可以理解为160MHz segment。BS这里表示主160MHz或从160MHz，而B0在P160MHz时表示主、从80MHz，B0在S160MHz时表示其中频率较低的80MHz和频率较高的80MHz。例如，该2比特(BSB0)其指示形式可以是00指示主(Primary)80MHz(P80MHz)，01指示从(Secondary)80MHz(S80MHz)，10指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较低的80MHz，又称为第三80MHz，11指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较高的80MHz，又称为第四80MHz。此处，该2比特的值和意义的对应关系仅为举例，其他的实现方式中，2比特的值和意义的对应关系可以互换。
对于11be设备，它可能接收一个11be用户信息字段，也可能接收一个11ax用户信息字段，当采用主从指示的情况时可以为用户信息字段的识别带来优势：如在触发帧的公共字段部分，我们可以采用4比特的比特图形式来分别指示主80MHz、从80MHz、第三80MHz、第四80MHz属于HE/EHT(也可以使用2比特，只指示主80MHz、从80MHz)。在这样的架构下，一个11be设备可以通过BS、B0来获知自己被分配的RU全部或部分属于哪一个80MHz(因为本实施例的指示方法是可以指示RU或/MRU中最小RU所在的80MHz)，进而通过HE/EHT指示获知读取的用户信息字段属于11ax用户信息字段还是11be的用户信息字段：如比特图为0011表示主从80MHz为ax用户信息字段、从160MHz为be用户信息字段， 那么11be接收机可以通过BS、B0来定位到某一个80MHz上，如从80MHz，那么由于该80MHz指示的是ax用户信息字段，因此11be设备按照ax的用户信息字段解读即可。综上，BS、B0采用主从80MHz的设置方法有利于11be对于HE/EHT的识别。
应注意，BS所处位置在11ax用户字段中通常设置为0(可以是预留字段B39)，而11ax的用户信息字段由于本身处在主160MHz，因此BS也应该为0，默认为主160MHz。同时，B0位置在11ax和11be的用户信息字段中均处于同一位置。因此，当11be设备在读取一个不知是HE/EHT用户信息字段的时候，通过BS和B0再结合上述x比特的HE/EHT比特图可以达到区分HE/EHT的目的。11be用户信息字段指示主从80MHz时可以是BS-B0等于00或01，11ax用户信息字段指示主从80MHz时也是BS-B0等于00与01，因此相互兼容。另外，11be用户信息字段的BS-B0还可以指示10与11，表示从160MHz中的80MHz。
实施例(1)主从指示与绝对指示的2比特对应关系表。
本实施例(1)提供如下表4(1)的对应关系的设计。表4(1)，2比特指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况(a、b、c、d)，与2比特指示绝对频率下80MHz的对应关系。这里的绝对频率是某个80MHz在整个320MHz带宽上所处的绝对位置。Case a与绝对频率的位置分布一致，即主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz上，Case b中，主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz上，Case c中主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz上，Case d中主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz上。表格4(1)中每一行表示四种主从分布情况下对应的绝对频率下80MHz指示的取值，如第一行：绝对频率的00对应a0、b1、c2、d2(即Case a取值00时对应决定位置00，Case b取值01时对应绝对位置00，Case c取值10对应绝对位置00,Case d取值10对应绝对位置00)。需要说明的是，此处两个比特的取值与其表示的含义仅为举例，具体实现中，还可以有其他的对应关系，但是主从分布情况和绝对频率下80MHz指示的取值之间具有映射关系。
这样在接收端设备，已知自己是哪种Case的情况下，如Case c，当收到的两比特指示是c3(11)时，只需要将c3对应为绝对位置中的01即可，然后结合前述实施例所述的7比特的资源单元指示，查表4可知最终分配的RU/MRU。相当于接收端设备有一个从相对位置转换到绝对位置的操作。这里的接收端设备，可以是non-AP STA。
主从指示与绝对频率指示的2比特对应关系表4(1)如下所示：
表4(1)
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000005
说明：BS和B0这里可以指示MRU或RU中的最小的RU所在的那个80MHz，采用主从位置指示法。如3*996由2*996+996构成，这里可以指示996所在的那个80MHz的位置；又如3*996+484，可以指示484所在的那个80MHz的位置。
如上所述，RU Allocation subfield中可以采用2比特来指示某一80MHz的位置，指示形式可以是：00指示主80MHz，01指示从80MHz，10指示第三个80MHz(S160中的频率较低的80MHz)，11指示第四个80MHz(S160中的频率较高的80MHz)。
本申请实施例中，用N来表示RU Allocation subfield中的2比特指示某一80MHz位置时该80MHz对应的绝对频率从低到高的次序：0、1、2、3。其中，0、1、2、3分别表示最低频80MHz、次低频80MHz、次高频80MHz和最高频80MHz。N可以用来计算RU在频域范围内的实际位置。
如果上述表格4(1)中的2比特的绝对频率指示分别用X1、X0表示，则有如下对应关系：N＝2*X1+X0。如果用表格的形式来表示BS、B0到N的映射关系，表格4(1)可以等价的表示为如下形式，换句话说，表4-A是表4(1)的等价表现形式，可以从表4(1)毫无疑义的得到。
表4-A
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000006
该表格4-A还可以表述为下述表格4-B(二者完全等价，仅表达方式不同，换句话说，表4-B是表4(1)或者表4-A的等价表现形式，可以从表4(1)或者表4-A毫无疑义的得到)：
表4-B
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000007
下面介绍两种将上述表格4(1)或4-A或4-B进行公式化的设计方法，即如何通过公示表示BS、B0与X1、X0乃至N的关系。换句话说，下述的公式是将上述表格4(1)或4-A或4-B等价表现形式。
其中方式一借助了对80MHz、160MHz主从位置的描述，方式二借助了不同情况a/b/c/d的划分。
方式一：求N＝function(BS,B0,C80,C160)的关系式
可以设计如下对应公式：
如果按照频率从低到高的顺序有[P80 S80]，那么C80＝0，否则C80＝1(此时有[S80 P80])；
C80表示主从80MHz(P80 S80)和绝对频率的位置关系，如果主80MHz的频率低于从80MHz的频率，则C80＝0；否则，C80＝1，此时表示为[S80 P80]。
如果按照频率从低到高的顺序有[P160 S160]，那么C160＝0，否则C160＝1(此时有[S160 P160])；
C160描述了主从160MHz(P160 S160)和绝对频率的位置关系，如果主160MHz的频率低于从160MHz的频率，则C160＝0；否则，C160＝1，表示为[S160 P160]。
BS＝0表示位置在主160MHz，BS＝1表示位置在从160MHz；
则BS、B0、X1、X0可以有如下公式关系(XOR表示异或操作，参数上的横线表示取反操作)：
X1可以进行如下的计算：X1＝XOR(BS,C160)
而X0的求法如下：
对于C80等于0，有X0＝B0；
对于C80等于1时：
BS等于1时，有
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000008
BS等于0时，有
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000009
即都有
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000010
所以可以写为如下形式：
写法1：
如果C80＝1，那么
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000011
否则，X0＝B0；
写法2：
如果C80＝1且BS＝0，那么
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000012
否则，X0＝B0；
写法3：
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000013
由于N＝2*X1+X0，可以进一步表示BS、B0和N的关系，如将上述写法3代入N有：
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000014
方式二：求N＝function(BS,B0,Case a/b/c/d)的关系式
如前所述，归纳N和BS、B0在不同case下的关系，有如下公式：
case a中为：N＝2*BS+B0
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000015
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000016
case c中为：
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000017
case d中为：
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000018
其中，右边表达式的第一项与X1相关，第二项与X0相关。
综上，应注意，方式一、方式二中给出了X1、X0的计算方法(如何由BS、B0得到X1、X0)，也给出了BS、B0到N的计算方法。尽管公式法中列举的N的取值为0、1、2、3，分别表示从最低到最高的80MHz的顺序，但仍适用于其他次序，如用1、2、3、4表示次序时，此时N可以等于2*X1+X0+1，将BS、B0代入X1、X0即可。
基于上述描述的技术方案，发送端设备通过RU Allocation subfield中的2比特(BS B0)，指示某一80MHz的位置。接收端设备根据RU Allocation subfield中的2比特(BS B0)，通过上述表格或公式的换算关系，获得某一80MHz对应320MHz中的绝对频率X1、X0，或获得某一80MHz对应320MHz中的绝对频率从低到高的次序N。实施本申请实施例，可以以最小的RU Allocation subfield的指示开销，实现对RU/MRU中分配指示。
实施例(2)：将实施例(1)的表格4(1)直接嵌入下表4(2)中。
为了更加便于设备读取，可以直接将主从位置指示法下的2比特指示直接融入9比特的绝对位置指示表中。即将原来的绝对位置表格中的2比特80MHz绝对位置值替换为对应的相对位置值即可，如实施例(1)中的表所示，第一行有：最低80MHz(绝对位置下的00)对应a0、b1、c2、d2，其他行类似。如此，设备可以直接读取表4(2)，而无需在进行比特值的映射和转换后，再读取资源单元指示才可以最终获取被分配的RU/MRU。
基于上述动机，9比特主从位置指示法的2比特指示可以如下表4(2)所示：
主从位置的指示方法，其中2比特指示可以是指示RU/MRU中一个最小RU所在80MHz中的位置。
表4(2)
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000019
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000020
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000021
实施例(3)又一种实现中，可以将上述表4(2)设计成4张表。
根据上面表4(1)的对应关系，表4(2)也可以拆成如下的4张表格分别为表4(2a)、表4(2b)、表4(2c)、表4(2d)，即只包含case a或case b或case c或case d的表格，一张表格无须涉及其他case的BS、B0指示。
当为Case a时读取下述表4(2a)：
表4(2a)
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000022
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000023
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000024
当为Case b时为下述表4(2b)：
表4(2b)
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000025
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000026
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000027
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000028
当为Case c时为下述表4(2c)：
表4(2c)
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000029
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000030
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000031
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000032
当为Case d时为下述表格4(2d)：
表4(2d)
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000033
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000034
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000035
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000036
实施例(4)：2比特位置指示+7比特表格指示法
这是另一种实现RU allocation subfield表格指示的技术方案，即仅采用7比特表格指示法，指示由比特BS、B0确定的80MHz位置情况下的具体RU/MRU。以3*996+484为例，当7比特指示为105时(B7-B1)，共存在如下四种MRU情况：
-MRU1:RU2(484T)+RU2(996T)+RU2(2x996T)
-MRU3:RU4(484T)+RU1(996T)+RU2(2x996T)
-MRU5:RU6(484T)+RU4(996T)+RU1(2x996T)
-MRU7:RU8(484T)+RU3(996T)+RU1(2x996T)
根据2比特的BS、B0指示，可以确定选取MRU1或MRU3或MRU5或MRU7。即该方法的思路是在给定7比特某一数值对应的RU/MRU集合后，结合两比特的BS、B0可以确定该集合中的一种具体MRU。
应注意到，对应资源单元大小下的MRUx或RUx可以表示一个具体的RU/MRU位置。
两比特BS-B0采用主从位置的指示方法，其中2比特指示可以是指示RU/MRU中一个最小RU所在80MHz中的位置。具体如表4(3)所示：
表4(3)
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000037
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000038
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000039
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000040
上述表格中的MRU的含义，可以参见如表4(4a)和表4(4b)所示的附录MRU索引。
MRU Index即MRU索引，注意MRU索引表示的并非资源单元分配子字段中7比特或9比特得到的数值，而可以理解为是MRU样式，如下表4(4a)和表4(4b)所示为160MHz和320MHz时的MRU索引：
表4(4a)
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000041
表4(4b)
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000042
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000043
应理解，上述表4(1)，表4(2)，表4(2a)、表4(2b)、表4(2c)、表4(2d)、表4(3)、表4(4a)、表4(4b)等本申请实施例提供的表中涉及的索引和RU/MRU之间的映射关系仅为示意，在具体实现中，可以基于本申请实施例提供的技术方案，衍变出其他的表格形式，均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。还应理解，本申请实施例提供的上述指示主从指示方法，在方案不冲突的前提下，可以与本申请中其他的实施例相结合实施，例如可以与实施例一-实施例六提供的资源单元指示方法以及装置相结合。
实施例二，该实施例二主要描述资源单元指示方法120。
请参阅图15，图15是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法120的流程示意图，图15所示的资源单元指示方法120与上述图6所示的资源单元指示方法110相比，不同之处在于频带范围指示所指示的频带范围大小不同，即该资源单元指示方法120中频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的RU所在的40MHz。如图15所示，该资源单元指示方法120可包括但不限于以下步骤：
S121、接入点确定触发帧；
触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的资源单元RU所在的40MHz。
S122、接入点发送触发帧；
S123、站点接收来自接入点的触发帧；
S124、站点根据频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU。
一种实现方式中，步骤S124中站点根据频带范围指示和所述资源单元指示，确定被分配的MRU，包括：站点确定频带范围指示所指示的40MHz，可获知资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小的RU在该40MHz中，进而结合资源单元指示的索引获知被分配的MRU。
例如，资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(52+26)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(52+26)-tone RU中26-tone RU所在的40MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(106+26)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(106+26)-tone RU中26-tone RU所在的40MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(484+242)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(484+242)-tone RU中242-tone RU所在的40MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(996+484)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的40MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(2*996+484)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(2*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的40MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是3*996-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是3*996-tone RU中一个996-tone RU所在的40MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(3*996+484)-tone RU，所述频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(3*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的40MHz；或资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(996+484+242)-tone RU，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是(996+484+242)-tone RU中242-tone RU所在的40MHz。
该情况下，996-tone RU所在的40MHz表示该996-tone RU覆盖的40MHz，由于996-tone RU覆盖的40MHz有两个，因此，频率范围指示可指示该两个中的任一个40MHz的位置，或者预定义指示该两个40MHz中频率最低的40MHz的位置，或预定义指示该两个40MHz中频率最高的40MHz的位置。
假设资源单元分配子字段有9个比特，频带范围指示为资源单元分配子字段中的第一个至第三个比特，记为B0、B1、B2。那么，B0、B1、B2指示320MHz中的一个40MHz。假设如表5所示，表3是频带范围指示(B0、B1、B2)需指示的各40MHz，以表示资源单元指示所指示的MRU中最小RU所在的40MHz。其中，320MHz中的各40MHz频带范围，按照频率从低到高依次称为第一个40MHz、第二个40MHz、第三个40MHz、第四个40MHz、第五个40MHz、第六个40MHz、第七个40MHz、第八个40MHz。如表5所示，B0B1B2为不同的值，分别表示上述八个40MHz。
表5频带范围指示(B0、B1、B2)需指示的各频带范围
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000044
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000045
资源单元指示为资源单元分配子字段中的第四个至第九个比特，记为B3至B8。那么，结合频带范围指示以及所需指示的各RU或MRU，资源单元指示需指示的RU或MRU可如表6但不限于表6所示。表6中第一列是B3至B8的值，可称为资源单元指示所指示的索引；表6中第二列表示各索引所对应的资源单元大小；表6中第三列表示各资源单元大小对应的索引个数，即条目数。其中，表6中每个索引可结合频带范围指示确定对应的RU或MRU。
表6资源单元指示(B8至B3)可指示的条目
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000046
如图3所示，40MHz中26-tone RU具有18个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指示的40MHz的基础上，通过指示表6所示的索引0至17中的一个，以指示对应的该40MHz中一个26-tone RU。可见，该实施方式减少了指示26-tone RU在带宽中的位置所需的索引数。
如图3所示，40MHz中52-tone RU具有8个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指示的40MHz的基础上，通过指示如表6所示的索引18至25中的一索引，以指示对应的该40MHz中一个52-tone RU。可见，该实施方式减少了指示52-tone RU在带宽中的位置所需的索引数。
如图3所示，40MHz中106-tone RU具有4个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指示的40MHz的基础上，通过指示如表6所示的索引26至29中的一索引，以指示对应的该40MHz中一个106-tone RU。
如图3所示，40MHz中242-tone RU具有2个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指示的40MHz的基础上，通过指示如表6所示的索引30至31中的一索引，以指示对应的该40MHz中一个242-tone RU。
如图3所示，40MHz中484-tone RU具有1个位置，资源单元指示在频带范围指示所指示的40MHz的基础上，通过指示如表6所示的索引32，以指示对应的该40MHz就是484-tone RU。
如图3所示，996-tone RU占用两个40MHz，因此，频带范围指示可指示该两个40MHz中的任一个；相应的，资源单元指示可在频带范围指示所指示的40MHz的基础上，通过指示 如表6所示的索引33，以指示该40MHz对应的996-tone RU。例如，频带范围指示为000，基于表5可知，频带范围指示所指示的40MHz是320MHz中的第一个40MHz；资源单元指示所指示的索引是33，结合表6可知，该索引33对应的RU是996-tone RU，结合频带范围指示所指示的320MHz中的第一个40MHz可知，资源单元指示所指示的996-tone RU是320MHz中的第一个996-tone RU。
由于2*996-tone RU不能横跨两个160MHz，即2*996-tone RU所在的频带范围只能是主160MHz或从160MHz，故频带范围指示可指示2*996-tone RU中一个996-tone RU所在的40MHz，即可获知2*996-tone RU位置，故资源单元指示只需一个索引34即可。例如，站点根据频带范围指示以及表5可确定MRU中最小RU所在的40MHz是第一个40MHz，再结合资源单元指示所指示的索引34对应的RU size是2*996-tone RU，故站点可获知被分配的2*996-tone RU是主160MHz对应的。
320MHz中4*996-tone RU只有一个，故资源单元指示可指示一个索引35，即可使得站点获知被分配的RU是4*996-tone RU。
20MHz中(52+26)-tone RU具有如图7所示的三种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的26-tone RU所在的40MHz的基础上，资源单元指示还需指示索引36至索引41中的一个，以指示对应的该40MHz中的一种(52+26)-tone RU。其中，索引36至索引41中各索引与该6种(52+26)-tone RU中每种(52+26)-tone RU的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该6种(52+26)-tone RU的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
20MHz中(106+26)-tone RU具有如图8所示的两种组合。因此，40MHz中(106+26)-tone RU具有4(即2*2)种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的26-tone RU所在的40MHz的基础上，资源单元指示还需指示索引42至索引45中的一个，以指示对应的该40MHz中的一种(106+26)-tone RU。其中，索引42至索引45中各索引与该8种(106+26)-tone RU中每种(106+26)-tone RU的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该8种(106+26)-tone RU的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
80MHz中(484+242)-tone RU具有如图9所示的四种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的242-tone RU所在的40MHz的基础上，该(484+242)-tone RU中484-tone RU的位置也固定，因此，资源单元指示只需指示242-tone RU在该40MHz中的两个位置中的一个即可。因此，资源单元指示还需指示索引46至索引47中的一个，以指示对应的一种(484+242)-tone RU。其中，索引46至索引47中各索引与242-tone RU在该40MHz中的两个位置的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该两种位置中242-tone RU的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。例如，索引46对应40MHz中的第一个242-tone RU，索引47对应40MHz中的第二个242-tone RU。
由于(996+484)-tone RU可位于主160MHz内或从160MHz内，160MHz中(996+484)-tone RU具有如图10所示的四种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的484-tone RU所在的40MHz的基础上，站点可直接获知(996+484)-tone RU中996-tone RU和484-tone RU所在的位置，故资源单元指示只需指示一个索引48即可。
这样，对于接入点侧，频带范围指示可指示(996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的40MHz，资源单元指示可指示索引48以告知站点被分配的RU大小是(996+484)-tone RU。相应的，站点接收到该资源单元分配子字段后，可根据该频带范围指示所指示的40MHz，结合资源单元指示所指示的索引48和表6，可确定被分配的(996+484)-tone RU的位置。
一种实施方式，限定资源单元指示所指示的(2*996+484)-tone RU只能存在于320MHz中频率最低或频率最高的240MHz。这样，240MHz中(2*996+484)-tone RU具有如图11所示的 六种组合，即对于320MHz中频率最低或频率最高的240MHz来说(2*996+484)-tone RU具有6种组合。而在频带范围指示所指示的(2*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的40MHz的基础上，其余两个996-tone RU可以是频率最低的240MHz中的两个996-tone RU，也可以是频率最高的240MHz中的两个996-tone RU，即资源单元指示还需两个索引，如索引52、索引53，一个索引对应一个频率最低的240MHz，一个索引对应一个频率最高的240MHz。
另一种实施方式中，为了简化逻辑，不限定资源单元指示所指示的(2*996+484)-tone RU只能存在于320MHz中频率最低或频率最高的240MHz。这样，在频带范围指示所指示的(2*996+484)-tone RU中484-tone RU所在的40MHz的基础上，其余两个996-tone RU可以是320MHz中除484-tone RU所在的80MHz之外的其余三个996-tone RU中任意两个996-tone RU，因此，资源单元指示还需指示三个索引，即索引49至索引51，以指示对应的(2*996+484)-tone RU的位置。
320MHz中(3*996)-tone RU具有如图12所示的四种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的996-tone RU所在的40MHz的基础上，320MHz中(3*996)-tone RU中其余两个996-tone RU有三种选择，故资源单元指示还需指示索引52至索引54中的一个，以指示320MHz中与该40MHz对应的996-tone RU组合的其余两个996-tone RU的一种位置。其中，索引52至索引54中各索引与其余两个996-tone RU的三种选择中的一种的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以每种选择的两个996-tone RU的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
例如，资源单元指示所指示的MRU的大小是(3*996)-tone RU，且资源单元指示所指示的索引的大小，与该(3*996)-tone RU的可选组合的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。那么，接入点为站点分配如图12所示的最后一行所示的(3*996)-tone RU时，需结合表5将该站点对应的B0B1B2设置为000(或001)，B3至B8设置为52；进而，站点获知该MRU的最小RU所在的40MHz是320MHz中的第一个或第二个40MHz，B3至B8指示的索引对应的RU大小是(3*996)-tone RU，且B3至B8的索引52。由于表6中索引52对应图12中第三行所示的(3*996)-tone RU、索引53对应图12中第二行所示的(3*996)-tone RU、索引54对应图12中第一行所示的(3*996)-tone RU。因此，站点可根据索引52可获知被分配的(3*996)-tone RU是图12第三行所示的(3*996)-tone RU。
320MHz中(3*996+484)-tone RU具有如图13所示的八种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的484-tone RU所在的40MHz的基础上，320MHz中其余三个996-tone RU只有一种选择，且484-tone RU的位置确定，故资源单元指示只需一个索引54即可。
一个80MHz中的(484+242)-tone RU具有如图14所示的四种组合，故160MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU具有八种组合。因此，在频带范围指示所指示的242-tone RU所在的40MHz的基础上，160MHz中该80MHz之外的996-tone RU只有一种选择，但242-tone RU在40MHz中的位置有两种，故资源单元指示还需指示索引55至索引56中的一个，以指示242-tone RU在40MHz中的一种位置。其中，索引55至索引56中各索引与242-tone RU在40MHz中的两种位置的对应关系，可按照索引的大小，以该242-tone RU在40MHz中的两种位置的起始频率从低到高排序一一对应。
可见，经过上述分析可知，由于频带范围指示所指示的频带范围还能够告知MRU中最小的RU所在的频带范围，从而有利于资源单元指示采用更少的索引来分别指示MRU的各种可能的位置。如针对(996+484+242)-tone RU的八种组合，如表6所示，资源单元指示只需2个索引即可分别指示每种组合。再如针对(3*996+484)-tone RU的八种组合，如表6所示，资源单元指示只需1个索引即可分别指示每种组合。相比于频带范围指示仅指示MRU相关 的最低80MHz的方式，该资源单元指示方法120中频带范围指示可携带更多的信息，即可携带MRU中最小的RU所在的40MHz。例如，若频带范围指示仅指示MRU相关的最低80MHz，那么针对图10所示的(996+484)-tone RU的四种组合，资源单元指示需要四个索引来分别指示每种组合；若频带范围指示用于指示的是MRU中最小的RU所在的40MHz，如表6所示，资源单元指示只需要1个索引即可结合频带范围指示来指示每种(996+484)-tone RU的组合。因此，该资源单元指示方法120中频带范围指示可携带更多的信息，有利于资源单元指示采用更少的索引来分别指示MRU的各种可能的位置。
本申请实施例中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的RU所在的频带范围，除了上述资源单元指示方法110中的80MHz、上述资源单元指示方法120中的40MHz外，还可以是160MHz、240MHz或320MHz。也就是说，在一种资源单元指示方法中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的RU所在的160MHz。在另一种资源单元指示方法中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的RU所在的240MHz。在又一种资源单元指示方法中，频带范围指示用于指示MRU中最小的RU所在的320MHz。这些资源单元指示方法的相关内容可参见上述资源单元指示方法110、资源单元指示方法120，此处不再详述。
另外，在上述各种资源单元指示方法中，当MRU中的最小RU大于频带范围指示所指示的频带范围时，该频带范围指示所指示的频带范围可以是该最小RU覆盖的频率最低的频带范围或频率最高的频带范围，或者该频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的选择可以是任意的一频带范围或预设的频带范围。例如，在一种资源单元指示方法中，当频带范围指示所指示的频带范围小于MRU中的最小RU，则该频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是该最小RU对应频率最低的频带范围。再例如，在一种资源单元指示方法中，当频带范围指示所指示的频带范围小于MRU中的最小RU，则该频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是该最小RU对应频率最高的频带范围。
例如，上述资源单元指示方法120中，假设资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(3*996)-tone RU，该(3*996)-tone RU的最小RU为一个996-tone RU，由于频带范围指示所指示的40MHz小于该最小的RU，故频带范围指示所指示的40MHz可以是该996-tone RU中的任一个40MHz，也可以是预定义的该996-tone RU中频率最低的40MHz或频率最高的40MHz。
另外，若MRU中最小的RU存在多个时，该频带范围指示所指示的频带范围可以是任意，也可以预设，如是第一个最小RU所在的频带范围或最后一个最小RU所在频带范围。例如，上述资源单元指示方法110中，(3*996)-tone RU的最小RU有三个，均是996-tone RU，故频带范围指示所指示的80MHz可以是任一996-tone RU所在的80MHz，或者是(3*996)-tone RU中第一个996-tone RU所在的80MHz，或者是(3*996)-tone RU中最后一个996-tone RU所在的80MHz。
可选的，本申请还提供一些资源单元指示方法，若资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(2*996+484)-tone RU，则频带范围指示所指示的80MHz是320MHz中的第一个或第二个80MHz时，表示该(2*996+484)-tone RU所在的240MHz是320MHz中的第一至第三个80MHz，频带范围指示所指示的80MHz是320MHz中的第三个或第四个80MHz时，表示该(2*996+484)-tone RU所在的240MHz是320MHz中的第二至第四个80MHz。这样，站点可基于该频带范围指示获知资源单元指示所指示的(2*996+484)-tone RU所在的240MHz。
实施例三，该实施例三主要描述资源单元指示方法210。
本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法210，该资源单元指示方法210中，频带范围指示 用于指示带宽中除资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围。请参阅图16，图16是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法210的流程示意图，如图16所示，该资源单元指示方法210可包括但不限于以下步骤：
S211、接入点确定触发帧；
触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的RU/MRU，频带范围指示用于指示带宽中除RU/MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围；
S212、接入点发送触发帧；
S213、站点接收触发帧；
S214、站点根据资源单元指示和频带范围指示，确定被分配的RU/MRU。
站点根据资源单元指示和频带范围指示，确定被分配的RU/MRU可包括：站点从320MHz中去除该频带范围指示所指示的频带范围之外的频带范围中确定资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU。
一种实施方式中，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中的一40MHz；资源单元指示所指示的MRU从除频带范围指示所指示的40MHz外的频带范围中确定。
例如，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的第一个40MHz，则资源单元指示所指示的MRU是从320MHz中除第一个40MHz之外的频带范围中确定的。若资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(3*996+484)-tone RU，则如图13所示，资源单元指示所指示的(3*996+484)-tone RU是从320MHz中除第一个40MHz之外的频率范围中确定的，即图13中第二行所示的一个(3*996+484)-tone RU。
另一种实施方式中，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中的一80MHz；资源单元指示所指示的MRU从除频带范围指示所指示的80MHz外的频带范围中确定。
例如，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的第一个80MHz，则该320MHz中除第一个80MHz之外的第二至第四个80MHz中，确定资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU；若资源单元指示所指示的MRU是3*996-tone RU，则该第二至第四个80MHz对应的3*996-tone RU就为站点被分配的MRU，如图12中第一行所示的3*996-tone RU。
又一种实施方式中，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中的一160MHz；资源单元指示所指示的MRU从除频带范围指示所指示的160MHz外的其余160MHz中确定。
例如，假设频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的主160MHz；资源单元指示所指示的MRU则从320MHz中的从160MHz中确定。若资源单元指示所指示的MRU的大小是(996+484)-tone RU，如图10所示，资源单元指示还需采用4个索引，以利用一个索引指示图10中的一个(996+484)-tone RU。
可见，该资源单元指示方法210中，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是与资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU不相关的频带范围，即站点需要从频带范围指示所指示的频带范围之外的频带范围中确定资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU。
实施例四，该实施例四主要描述资源单元指示方法220。
本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法220，该资源单元指示方法220中，频带范围指示用于指示带宽中的一频带范围，站点被分配的RU/MRU包括带宽中除该频带范围之外的RU。请参阅图17，图17是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法220的流程示意图，如图17所示，该资源单元指示方法220可包括但不限于以下步骤：
S221、接入点确定触发帧；
触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的RU/MRU，频带范围指示用于指示带宽的一频带范围；该MRU包括带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的频带范围外剩余的RU；
S222、接入点发送触发帧；
S223、站点接收触发帧；
S224、站点根据资源单元指示和频带范围指示，确定被分配的RU/MRU。
站点根据资源单元指示和频带范围指示，确定被分配的RU/MRU可包括：站点将320MHz中去除该频带范围指示所指示的频带范围之外的频带范围对应的RU/MRU作为被分配的RU/MRU。
可选的，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中的一40MHz；资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的40MHz外剩余的RU。
例如，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的第一个40MHz，则该320MHz中除第一个40MHz之外的RU，如图13所示，分别是484-tone RU和3个996-tone RU，若资源单元指示所指示的MRU是(3*996+484)-tone RU，则该MRU是该320MHz中除第一个40MHz之外的RU，如图13中第二行所示的(3*996+484)-tone RU。
可选的，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中的一80MHz；资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的80MHz外剩余的RU。
例如，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的第一个80MHz，则该320MHz中除第一个80MHz之外的第二至第四个80MHz，若资源单元指示所指示的MRU是3*996-tone RU，则该第二至第四个80MHz对应的3*996-tone RU就为站点被分配的MRU，如图12中第一行所示的3*996-tone RU。
又一种实施方式中，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是带宽中的一160MHz；资源单元指示所指示的MRU包括除频带范围指示所指示的160MHz外的剩余的RU。
例如，假设频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的主160MHz，则资源单元指示所指示的MRU是从160MHz对应的2*996-tone RU。
可见，该资源单元指示方法220中，资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU是频带范围指示所指示的频带范围之外的频带范围所对应的RU/MRU。有利于更加节省资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数，还能够简化处理逻辑，有利于降低站点的处理复杂度。
实施例五，该实施例五主要描述资源单元指示方法310。
本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法，该资源单元指示方法中，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度与资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU有关。当RU/MRU所占(或所在)的频带范围小于或等于80MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是80MHz；当RU/MRU所占的频带范围大于80MHz且小于或等于160MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是160MHz；当RU/MRU所占的频带范围大于160MHz且小于320MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是320MHz。
或者，将频带范围指示所指示的240MHz的可能也加入，则当RU/MRU所占的频带范围大于160MHz且小于或等于240MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是240MHz；当RU/MRU所占的频带范围大于240MHz且小于或等于320MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是320MHz。
本文中，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围实际是指该频带范围的大小和位置，即该频率 范围在带宽中的位置或带宽中的该频带范围。例如，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为带宽中的一个80MHz，表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是80MHz以及该80MHz在带宽中位置。
假设频带范围指示为资源单元分配子字段中的前两个比特，记为B0、B1。其中：
当频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是80MHz时，该B0、B1可表示4种状态，以分别指示320MHz中的四个80MHz；
当频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是160MHz时，一种方式，该B0的0或1来表示频率最高的160MHz还是频率最低的160MHz，其中，B1可保留；另一种方式，也可通过B1的0或1来表示频率最高的160MHz还是频率最低的160MHz，B0保留；又一种方式，B0对应频率最高的160MHz，B1对应频率最低的160MHz，若B0置1，则表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是频率最高的160MHz，若B1置1，则表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是频率最低的160MHz；又一种方式，可采用B0、B1表示的4种状态中的两种状态表示，如00对应频率最低的240MHz，01对应频率最高的240MHz。
当频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是320MHz时，一种方式，由于不存在多种320MHz的位置，所以本申请不限制B0、B1的值，可保留或随意设置；另一种方式，可采用B0、B1表示的4种状态中的一种，如00，来表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz。
当频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的粒度是240MHz时，B0、B1可表示4种状态，以分别指示320MHz中的四种240MHz的组合；
当要求MRU所在的240Mhz是连续的240MHz时，一种方式中B0对应频率最高的240MHz，B1对应频率最低的240MHz，若B0置1，则表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是频率最高的240MHz，若B1置1，则表示频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是频率最低的240MHz；另一种方式中，可采用B0、B1表示的4种状态中的两种状态表示连续的240MHz，如00对应频率最低的240MHz，01对应频率最高的240MHz。
资源单元指示方法310以“频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU所在的频带范围”为例阐述。请参阅图18，图18是本申请实施例提供一种资源单元指示方法310的流程示意图，如图18所示，该资源单元指示方法310可包括但不限于以下步骤：
S311、接入点确定触发帧；
触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给对应的站点的RU/MRU；频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU所在的频带范围；
S312、接入点发送触发帧；
S313、站点接收触发帧；
S314、站点根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的RU/MRU。
该方法中，资源单元指示所指示的MRU/RU与频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的关系可为：
资源单元指示所指示的MRU/RU所在的频带范围小于或等于80MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为带宽中的一个80MHz；
资源单元指示所指示的MRU/RU所在的频带范围大于80MHz且小于或等于160MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为带宽中的一个160MHz；
资源单元指示所指示的MRU/RU所在的频带范围大于160MHz且小于或等于240MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为带宽中的一个240MHz或320MHz；
资源单元指示所指示的MRU/RU所在的频带范围大于240MHz且小于或等于320MHz时，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围为带宽中的一个320MHz。
那么，在上述资源单元指示所指示的MRU/RU与频带范围指示所指示的频带范围的关系下，资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数可结合上述图3、图7至图14所示的各RU/MRU，获得如表7所示的索引表。
表7资源单元指示(B8至B2)可指示的条目
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000047
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000048
资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU所在的频带范围是小于或等于80MHz，故频带范围指示所指示的80MHz是该RU/MRU所在的80MHz。其中，每种RU/MRU大小所对应的条目数等于80MHz中该大小RU/MRU的可选位置数。
故如表7所示，26-tone RU对应的索引数等于80MHz中26-tone RU的可选位置数36，每个索引对应80MHz中的一个26-tone RU。
如表7所示，(52+26)-tone RU对应的索引数等于80MHz中(52+26)-tone RU的可选位置数，如图7所示，80MHz中(52+26)-tone RU的可选位置数具有12(即4*3)种。因此，资源单元指示需要12个索引，以分别指示80MHz中的每个(52+26)-tone RU。
如表7所示，(106+26)-tone RU对应的索引数等于80MHz中(106+26)-tone RU的可选位置数，如图8所示，80MHz中(106+26)-tone RU的可选位置数具有8种。因此，资源单元指示需要8个索引，以分别指示80MHz中的每个(106+26)-tone RU。
如表7所示，(484+242)-tone RU对应的索引数等于80MHz中(484+242)-tone RU的可选位置数，如图9所示，80MHz中(484+242)-tone RU的可选位置数具有4种。因此，资源单元指示需要4个索引，以分别指示80MHz中的每个(484+242)-tone RU。
资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU所在的频带范围是大于80MHz且小于或等于160MHz，故频带范围指示所指示的160MHz是该RU/MRU所在的160MHz。其中，每种RU/MRU大小所对应的条目数等于160MHz中该大小RU/MRU的可选位置数。
故如表7所示，2*996-tone RU对应的索引数等于160MHz中2*996-tone RU的可选位置数1，即资源单元指示只需指示一个索引，站点结合频带范围指示即可获知被分配的2*996-tone RU。
如表7所示，(996+484)-tone RU对应的索引数等于160MHz中(996+484)-tone RU的可选位置数4(如图10所示)，即资源单元指示需要4个索引，以分别指示160MHz中的每个(996+484)-tone RU。
针对资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU所在的频带范围是大于160MHz且小于或等于320MHz的情况，有两种实现方式，实现方式1是引入240MHz的频带范围，实现方式2是 不引入240MHz的频带范围，以下分别阐述。
实现方式1，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围存在240MHz的频带范围。
资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU所在的频带范围是大于160MHz且小于或等于240MHz，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是240MHz，即是该RU/MRU所在的240MHz。其中，每种RU/MRU大小所对应的条目数等于240MHz中该大小RU/MRU的可选位置数。
(2*996+484)-tone RU对应的索引数等于240MHz中(2*996+484)-tone RU的可选位置数6(图11所示的可选位置数6)，即资源单元指示需要6个索引(如表7所示的索引97至索引102)，以分别指示240MHz中的每个(2*996+484)-tone RU。
3*996-tone RU对应的索引数等于240MHz中3*996-tone RU的可选位置数1，即资源单元指示需要1个索引即可指示240MHz中的3*996-tone RU。
资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU所在的频带范围是大于240MHz且小于或等于320MHz，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz，即是该RU/MRU所在的320MHz。其中，每种RU/MRU大小所对应的条目数等于320MHz中该大小RU/MRU的可选位置数。
4*996-tone RU对应的索引数等于320MHz中4*996-tone RU的可选位置数1，即资源单元指示需要1个索引(如表7所示的索引68)，以指示该4*996-tone RU。
(3*996+484)-tone RU对应的索引数等于320MHz中(3*996+484)-tone RU的可选位置数8(如图13所示)，即资源单元指示需要8个索引(如表7所示的索引107至索引114)，以指示320MHz中每个(3*996+484)-tone RU。
(996+484+242)-tone RU对应的索引数等于320MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU的可选位置数8(2*图14所示的4个可选位置)，即资源单元指示需要8个索引(如表7所示的索引115至索引122)，以指示320MHz中每个(996+484+242)-tone RU。
实现方式2，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围不存在240MHz的频带范围。
资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU所在的频带范围是大于160MHz且小于或等于320MHz，频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz，即是该RU/MRU所在的320MHz。其中，每种RU/MRU大小所对应的条目数等于320MHz中该大小RU/MRU的可选位置数。
(2*996+484)-tone RU对应的索引数等于320MHz中(2*996+484)-tone RU的可选位置数12(2*图11所示的可选位置数6)，即资源单元指示需要12个索引，以分别指示320MHz中的每个(2*996+484)-tone RU。
4*996-tone RU对应的索引数等于320MHz中4*996-tone RU的可选位置数1，即资源单元指示需要1个索引(如表7所示的索引68)，以指示该4*996-tone RU。
3*996-tone RU对应的索引数等于320MHz中3*996-tone RU的可选位置数4(如图12所示)，即资源单元指示需要4个索引(如表7所示的索引103至索引106)，以指示320MHz中每个3*996-tone RU。
(3*996+484)-tone RU对应的索引数等于320MHz中(3*996+484)-tone RU的可选位置数8(如图13所示)，即资源单元指示需要8个索引(如表7所示的索引107至索引114)，以指示320MHz中每个(3*996+484)-tone RU。
(996+484+242)-tone RU对应的索引数等于320MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU的可选位置数8(2*图14所示的4个可选位置)，即资源单元指示需要8个索引(如表7所示的索引115至索引122)，以指示320MHz中每个(996+484+242)-tone RU。
可见，上述两种实现方式，对(2*996+484)-tone RU、3*996-tone RU分别对应的索引数有影响，如在实现方式1中(2*996+484)-tone RU对应的索引数为6，3*996-tone RU对应的索引 数为1；在实现方式2中(2*996+484)-tone RU对应的索引数为12，3*996-tone RU对应的索引数为4。
一种实现方式，针对同一大小的RU/MRU，每种RU/MRU对应的索引数，可按照索引数从小到大与RU/MRU的起始频率从低到高的顺序一一对应确定。其中，若多种MRU的起始频率相同，则以其中第二个RU的起始频率的顺序确定，依次类推。其中，若多种MRU中各RU的起始频率均相同，则以最后一个起始频率相同的RU的大小为顺序排列。例如，实现方式1中(2*996+484)-tone RU对应的索引数是索引97至索引102，240MHz中每种(2*996+484)-tone RU的起始频率从低到高的顺序是：图11中的第二行的第一种组合、图11中第三行的第一种组合、图11中第三行的第二种组合、图11中第一行的第一种组合、图11中第二行的第二种组合、图11中第一行的第二种组合。因此，索引97表示图11中的第二行的第一种组合，索引98表示图11中第三行的第一种组合，索引99表示图11中第三行的第二种组合，索引100表示图11中第一行的第一种组合，索引101表示图11中第二行的第二种组合，索引102表示图11中第一行的第二种组合。
另一种实现方式，针对同一大小的RU/MRU，每种RU/MRU对应的索引数，可按照索引数从小到大与RU/MRU中打孔的RU(即该RU/MRU未包括的RU)的起始频率从低到高的顺序一一对应确定。例如，图12所示的3*996-tone RU中，第一行所示的3*996-tone RU所在带宽中打孔的RU所在频率最低，故对应最小的索引；第二行所示的3*996-tone RU所在带宽中打孔的RU所在频率次低，故对应次小的索引；第三行所示的3*996-tone RU所在带宽中打孔的RU所在频率较高，故对应次大的索引；第四行所示的3*996-tone RU所在带宽中打孔的RU所在频率最高，故对应最大索引。
又一种实现方式，针对同一大小的RU/MRU，每种RU/MRU对应的索引数，可按照索引数从小到大与RU/MRU的权重RU所在频率从高到低的顺序一一对应确定。例如，图12所示的3*996-tone RU中，第一行所示的3*996-tone RU中三个996-tone RU所在频率均最高，故对应最小的索引；第二行所示的3*996-tone RU中两个996-tone RU所在频率均较高，故对应次小的索引；第三行所示的3*996-tone RU中一个996-tone RU所在频率均较低，故对应次大的索引；第四行所示的3*996-tone RU中三个996-tone RU所在频率均最低，故对应最大索引。
可见，该资源单元指示方法310中站点根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示确定被分配的RU/MRU时，可根据资源单元指示所指示的索引在表7中对应的RU/MRU的大小，以确定频带范围指示所指示的该RU/MRU所在的频带范围，进而在该频带范围内确定资源单元指示所指示的索引对应的RU/MRU。可见，资源单元指示可直接指示该频带范围中的RU/MRU，在利用频带范围指示携带更多信息的同时，尽可能的简化逻辑，有利于降低站点的处理复杂度。
另外上述各资源单元指示方法中，资源单元分配子字段占用N个比特；频带范围指示占用比特0至比特x，所述资源单元指示占用比特x+1至比特N；x的值与带宽和所述频带范围指示所指示的频带范围有关；N和所述x均大于零。例如，资源单元指示方法110中x等于1，或资源单元指示方法120中x等于2，或资源单元指示方法310中x等于2等。
另外，对于上述各实施例，频带范围指示和资源单元指示在N个比特中的位置可以互换，即上述实施例中前两个或前三个比特表示频带范围指示，后面其余比特表示资源单元指示，可以互换为：前八个或前七个比特表示资源单元指示，后面其余比特表示频带范围指示。
另外，本文所述的“频带范围”也可称为“频率范围”，频带范围指示也可称为频率范围指示，其中，频率范围或频带范围均对应连续的频率。
实施例六，该实施例六主要描述资源单元指示方法410。
本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法410，该方法中，站点对应的资源单元分配子字段占用N个比特，该N个比特指示的一个索引直接表示一个多资源单元MRU在带宽中的绝对位置，进而站点可根据该N个比特指示的索引，直接查表获知被分配的MRU。也就是说，该方法不再区分第一部分的比特指示某个粒度的频带范围，第二部分比特指示与该频带范围有关的组合模式，故该方法可称为资源单元指示的融合指示方式。因此，本申请所述的资源单元指示方法逻辑更加简化，进一步的降低站点的处理复杂度。以下对该方法进行阐述。
请参阅图19，图19是本申请实施例提供的一种资源单元指示方法410的流程示意图。图19所示的资源单元指示方法410可包括但不限于以下步骤：
S411、接入点确定触发帧；
触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段占用N个比特，该N个比特指示的一个索引直接表示一个多资源单元MRU在带宽中的绝对位置；N大于零；
S412、接入点发送触发帧；
S413、站点接收触发帧；
S414、站点确定该N个比特指示的索引直接对应的MRU，作为站点被分配的MRU。
其中，步骤S414中站点可从资源单元分配表中查询该N个比特指示的索引对应的MRU，作为该站点被分配的MRU。其中，该N个比特指示的索引是该站点对应的资源单元分配子字段的N个比特。
例如但不限于，资源单元分配表可如表8所示，N个比特用于指示每个RU/MRU在带宽中的绝对位置，N等于9，记为B0至B8。
表8资源单元分配表
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000049
如图3所示，80MHz中26-tone RU具有36个位置，那么320MHz中26-tone RU具有144个位置(即4*36)。因此，如表8所示，该B8至B0需要指示索引0至索引143的一个索引， 以指示一个26-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中52-tone RU具有16个位置，那么320MHz中52-tone RU具有64个位置(即4*16)。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引144至索引207的一个索引，以指示一个52-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中106-tone RU具有8个位置，那么320MHz中106-tone RU具有32个位置(即4*8)。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引144至索引207的一个索引，以指示一个106-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中242-tone RU具有4个位置，那么320MHz中242-tone RU具有16个位置(即4*4)。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引240至索引255的一个索引，以指示一个242-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中484-tone RU具有2个位置，那么320MHz中484-tone RU具有8个位置(即4*2)。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引256至索引263的一个索引，以指示一个484-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中996-tone RU具有1个位置，那么320MHz中996-tone RU具有4个位置。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引264至索引267的一个索引，以指示一个996-tone RU。
由于2*996-tone RU不能横跨两个160MHz，即2*996-tone RU所在的频带范围只能是主160MHz或从160MHz，故320MHz中2*996-tone RU具有2个位置。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引268至索引269的一个索引，以指示一个2*996-tone RU。
320MHz中4*996-tone RU只有一个，故该B8至B0可指示一个索引270，即可使得站点获知被分配的RU是4*996-tone RU。
20MHz中(52+26)-tone RU具有如图7所示的三种组合，那么320MHz中(52+26)-tone RU具有48种组合(即16*3)。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引271至索引318的一个索引，以指示一个(52+26)-tone RU。
20MHz中(106+26)-tone RU具有如图8所示的两种组合，那么320MHz中(106+26)-tone RU具有32种组合(即16*2)。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引319至索引350的一个索引，以指示一个(106+26)-tone RU。
80MHz中(484+242)-tone RU具有如图9所示的四种组合，那么320MHz中(484+242)-tone RU具有16种组合(即4*4)。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引351至索引366的一个索引，以指示一个(484+242)-tone RU。
由于(996+484)-tone RU可位于主160MHz内或从160MHz内，160MHz中(996+484)-tone RU具有如图10所示的四种组合，那么320MHz中(996+484)-tone RU具有8种组合(即2*4)。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引367至索引374的一个索引，以指示一个(996+484)-tone RU。
由于(2*996+484)-tone RU属于240MHz传输，只能存在于将320MHz中频率最低或最高的80MHz打孔形成的240MHz中，240MHz中(2*996+484)-tone RU具有如图11所示的六种组合，那么320MHz中(2*996+484)-tone RU具有12种组合(即2*6)。因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引375至索引386的一个索引，以指示一个(2*996+484)-tone RU。
320MHz中(3*996)-tone RU具有如图12所示的四种组合，因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引387至索引390的一个索引，以指示一个(3*996)-tone RU。
320MHz中(3*996+484)-tone RU具有如图13所示的八种组合，因此，该B8至B0需要指示索引391至索引398的一个索引，以指示一个(3*996+484)-tone RU。
160MHz中(484+242)-tone RU位于第一个80MHz中时，该160MHz中(996+484+242)-tone  RU具有如图14所示的四种组合，相应的，160MHz中(484+242)-tone RU位于第二个80MHz中时，该160MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU也具有四种组合，故160MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU具有八种组合。又因为(996+484+242)-tone RU只能位于频率最低的160MHz或频率最高的160MHz，因此，320MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU具有16种组合(即2*8)，该B8至B0需要指示索引399至索引414的一个索引，以指示一个(996+484+242)-tone RU。
可见，该资源单元指示方法410中，资源单元分配子字段中没有区分专门用于指示某个频带范围的比特，直接可根据资源单元分配子字段中N个比特所指示的索引，从资源分配表中查找对应的RU/MRU，从而大大简化了处理逻辑，有利于降低站点的处理复杂度。
本申请还提供一种资源单元指示方法，该资源单元指示方法与上述资源单元指示方法410的不同之处在于，资源单元分配子字段占用8个比特，且该资源单元分配子字段用于指示与160MHz的频带范围相关的RU/MRU。其中，站点可通过其他参数或信令获知该资源单元分配子字段所指示的RU/MRU相关的160MHz是主160MHz，还是从160MHz。假设资源单元分配子字段占用的8个比特记为B7至B0，则该B7至B0用于指示主160MHz或从160MHz涉及的所有RU/MRU。例如，B7至B0所指示的RU/MRU可如表9所示。
表9资源单元分配表
Figure PCTCN2021116560-appb-000050
如图3所示，80MHz中26-tone RU具有36个位置，那么160MHz中26-tone RU具有72个位置(即2*36)。因此，如表9所示，该B7至B0需要指示索引0至索引71的一个索引， 以指示一个26-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中52-tone RU具有16个位置，那么160MHz中52-tone RU具有32个位置(即2*16)。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引72至索引103的一个索引，以指示一个52-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中106-tone RU具有8个位置，那么160MHz中106-tone RU具有16个位置(即2*8)。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引104至索引119的一个索引，以指示一个106-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中242-tone RU具有4个位置，那么160MHz中242-tone RU具有8个位置(即2*4)。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引120至索引127的一个索引，以指示一个242-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中484-tone RU具有2个位置，那么160MHz中484-tone RU具有4个位置(即2*2)。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引128至索引131的一个索引，以指示一个484-tone RU。
如图3所示，80MHz中996-tone RU具有1个位置，那么160MHz中996-tone RU具有2个位置。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引132至索引133的一个索引，以指示一个996-tone RU。
由于2*996-tone RU不能横跨两个160MHz，即2*996-tone RU所在的频带范围只能是主160MHz或从160MHz，故160MHz中2*996-tone RU具有1个位置。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引134，以指示2*996-tone RU。
320MHz中4*996-tone RU只有一个，故该B7至B0可指示一个索引135，即可使得站点获知被分配的RU是4*996-tone RU。
20MHz中(52+26)-tone RU具有如图7所示的三种组合，那么160MHz中(52+26)-tone RU具有24种组合(即8*3)。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引136至索引159的一个索引，以指示一个(52+26)-tone RU。
20MHz中(106+26)-tone RU具有如图8所示的两种组合，那么160MHz中(106+26)-tone RU具有16种组合(即8*2)。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引160至索引175的一个索引，以指示一个(106+26)-tone RU。
80MHz中(484+242)-tone RU具有如图9所示的四种组合，那么160MHz中(484+242)-tone RU具有8种组合(即2*4)。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引176至索引183的一个索引，以指示一个(484+242)-tone RU。
由于(996+484)-tone RU可位于主160MHz内或从160MHz内，160MHz中(996+484)-tone RU具有如图10所示的四种组合，因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引184至索引187的一个索引，以指示一个(996+484)-tone RU。
由于(2*996+484)-tone RU属于240MHz传输，只能存在于将320MHz中频率最低或最高的80MHz打孔形成的240MHz中，240MHz中(2*996+484)-tone RU具有如图11所示的六种组合，那么320MHz中(2*996+484)-tone RU具有12种组合(即2*6)。由于(2*996+484)-tone RU的12种组合均与主160MHz或从160MHz有重叠，因此，160MHz涉及的(2*996+484)-tone RU共有12种组合，该B7至B0需要指示索引188至索引195的一个索引，以指示一个(2*996+484)-tone RU。
320MHz中3*996-tone RU具有如图12所示的四种组合，该四种组合在主160MHz或从160MHz中均涉及，因此，160MHz涉及的3*996-tone RU共有四种组合，该B7至B0需要指示索引200至索引203的一个索引，以指示一个(3*996)-tone RU。
320MHz中(3*996+484)-tone RU具有如图13所示的八种组合，该八种组合在主160MHz或从160MHz中均涉及，因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引204至索引211的一个索引，以指示一个(3*996+484)-tone RU。
160MHz中(484+242)-tone RU位于第一个80MHz中时，该160MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU具有如图14所示的四种组合，相应的，160MHz中(484+242)-tone RU位于第二个80MHz中时，该160MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU也具有四种组合，故160MHz中(996+484+242)-tone RU具有八种组合。因此，该B7至B0需要指示索引212至索引219的一个索引，以指示一个(996+484+242)-tone RU。
可见，该资源单元指示方法中，资源单元分配子字段采用8个比特即可指示160MHz涉及的各RU/MRU，减少了所需比特数，有利于节省信令开销。
在上述实施例中，对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重，某个实施例中没有详述的部分，可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。另外，不同实施例中可相互结合来指示站点被分配的RU/MRU，例如，资源单元指示方法210、或资源单元指示方法220中，资源单元指示和频带范围指示的相关内容可适用于资源单元指示方法110或资源单元指示方法120中部分MRU分配。如资源单元指示方法210中频带范围指示所指示的频带范围是320MHz中的第一个80MHz，则资源单元指示所指示的MRU是320MHz中除第一个80MHz之外的第二至第四个80MHz对应的3*996-tone RU，可应用到资源单元指示方法110中将表4所示的索引99至索引101更换为索引99，这样，站点结合资源单元指示方法210中频带范围指示的含义即可确定被分配的3*996-tone RU位置。
因此，上述表4、表6、表8、或表9中各大小的RU/MRU以及对应的索引排列的顺序、索引个数不是固定的，可结合上述实施例进行相应的变化。另外，表3与表4是相对独立的，表5与表6是相对独立的。如上所述，表4中某些RU/MRU对应的频带范围指示的含义可与表3所述的含义不同。
上述本申请提供的实施例中，分别从接入点、站点的角度对本申请实施例提供的方法进行了介绍。为了实现上述本申请实施例提供的方法中的各功能，接入点、站点可以包括硬件结构、软件模块，以硬件结构、软件模块、或硬件结构加软件模块的形式来实现上述各功能。上述各功能中的某个功能可以以硬件结构、软件模块、或者硬件结构加软件模块的方式来执行。
请参见图20，为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置500的结构示意图。图20所示的通信装置500可包括通信单元501和处理单元502。通信单元501可包括发送单元和接收单元，发送单元用于实现发送功能，接收单元用于实现接收功能，通信单元501可以实现发送功能和/或接收功能。通信单元也可以描述为收发单元。
通信装置500可以是站点，也可以是站点中的装置，还可以是接入点或接入点中的装置。
一种实施方式中，通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法110中站点的相关操作，该通信装置500可包括通信单元501和处理单元502；
通信单元501，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
处理单元502，用于根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的RU/MRU。
或者，通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法110中接入点的相关操作，处理单元502，用于确定触发帧；通信单元501，用于发送触发帧。
该实施方式中，触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单 元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给站点的RU/MRU，频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU中最小的RU所在的80MHz。
可见，该通信装置500能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。另外，频带范围指示所指示的80MHz是MRU中最小的RU所在的80MHz，相比于频带范围指示仅指示MRU相关的最低80MHz来说，该通信装置500有利于节省资源单元指示用于指示各MRU所需的索引个数。
又一种实施方式中，通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法120中站点的相关操作，该通信装置500可包括通信单元501和处理单元502；
通信单元501，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
处理单元502，用于根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的RU/MRU。
或者，通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法120中接入点的相关操作，处理单元502，用于确定触发帧；通信单元501，用于发送触发帧。
该实施方式中，触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给站点的RU/MRU，频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的RU/MRU中最小的RU所在的40MHz。
可见，该通信装置500能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。另外，频带范围指示所指示的40MHz是MRU中最小的RU所在的40MHz，相比于频带范围指示仅指示MRU相关的最低80MHz来说，该通信装置500有利于节省资源单元指示用于指示各MRU所需的索引个数。
又一种实施方式中，通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法210中站点的相关操作，该通信装置500可包括通信单元501和处理单元502；
通信单元501，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
处理单元502，用于根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的RU/MRU。
通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法210中接入点的相关操作，处理单元502，用于确定触发帧；通信单元501，用于发送触发帧。
该实施方式中，触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示带宽中除该MRU之外的部分或全部的资源单元RU所在的频带范围。
可见，该通信装置500中资源单元指示所需指示的MRU是从小于带宽的频带范围中确定的，与资源单元指示所需指示的MRU是从带宽对应的频带范围中确定的相比，有利于降低资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数。
又一种实施方式中，通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法220中站点的相关操作，或者通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法220中接入点的相关操作。该实施方式与上述资源单元指示方法210中的触发帧的不同之处在于，该实施方式中资源单元指示用于指示分配给该站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示一频带范围，该MRU包括带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的频带范围外剩余的RU。
可见，由于资源单元指示所指示的MRU是带宽中除频带范围指示所指示的频带范围之外剩余的RU组合的，与资源单元指示所需指示的MRU是从带宽对应的频带范围中确定的 相比，该通信装置500有利于降低资源单元指示所需指示的索引个数。
又一种实施方式中，通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法310中站点的相关操作，该通信装置500可包括通信单元501和处理单元502；
通信单元501，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
处理单元502，用于根据频带范围指示和资源单元指示，确定被分配的RU/MRU。
通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法310中接入点的相关操作，处理单元502，用于确定触发帧；通信单元501，用于发送触发帧。
该实施方式中，触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元子字段包括频带范围指示和资源单元指示；资源单元指示用于指示分配给该站点的多资源单元MRU，频带范围指示用于指示资源单元指示所指示的MRU所在的频带范围。
可见，该通信装置500中资源单元指示可只需指示该频带范围中的RU/MRU，减少了资源单元指示为了指示该大小的MRU所需指示的索引个数。也就是说，该通信装置500中频带范围指示可携带更多的信息，并尽可能的简化资源单元指示的逻辑，有利于降低站点的处理复杂度。
又一种实施方式中，通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法410中站点的相关操作，该通信装置500可包括通信单元501和处理单元502；
通信单元501，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧；
触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元子字段占用N个比特，N个比特指示的一个索引直接表示一个多资源单元MRU在带宽中的绝对位置；N大于零；
处理单元502，用于确定该N个比特指示的索引直接对应的MRU，作为站点被分配的MRU。
通信装置500可以执行上述方法实施例中资源单元指示方法410中接入点的相关操作，处理单元502，用于确定触发帧；通信单元501，用于发送触发帧。触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，该资源单元分配子字段占用N个比特，N个比特指示的一个索引直接表示一个多资源单元MRU在带宽中的绝对位置；N大于零。
可见，该通信装置500中资源单元分配子字段中没有区分专门用于指示某个频带范围的比特，直接可根据资源单元分配子字段中N个比特所指示的索引，查找对应的MRU，从而大大简化了处理逻辑，有利于降低站点的处理复杂度。
另外，该通信装置还可执行上述任一方法实施例所述的相关实施方式，此处不再详述。
请参阅图21，图21是本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置600的结构示意图。该通信装置600可以是接入点，也可以是站点，也可以是支持接入点实现上述方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等，还可以是支持站点实现上述方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器等。该通信装置可用于实现上述方法实施例中描述的方法，具体可以参见上述方法实施例中的说明。
通信装置600可以包括一个或多个处理器601。所述处理器601可以是通用处理器或者专用处理器等。所述处理器601可以用于对通信装置(如，接入点、接入点芯片，站点、站点芯片等)进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据。
可选的，通信装置600中可以包括一个或多个存储器602，其上可以存有指令604，所述指令可在所述处理器601上被运行，使得通信装置600执行上述方法实施例中描述的方法。可选的，所述存储器602中还可以存储有数据。所述处理器601和存储器602可以单独设置， 也可以集成在一起。
可选的，通信装置600还可以包括收发器605、天线606。所述收发器605可以称为收发单元、收发机、或收发电路等，用于实现收发功能。收发器605可以包括接收器和发送器，接收器可以称为接收机或接收电路等，用于实现接收功能；发送器可以称为发送机或发送电路等，用于实现发送功能。
一种实施方式中，该通信装置600可以是站点，或站点中的装置等。该实施方式中：
通信装置600中，收发器605用于执行图6中的S113的操作；执行图15中的S123的操作；执行图16中的S213的操作；执行图17中的S223的操作；执行图18中的S313的操作；执行图19中的S413的操作；处理器601用于执行图6中的S114的操作；执行图15中的S124的操作；执行图16中的S214的操作；执行图17中的S224的操作；执行图18中的S314的操作；执行图19中的S414的操作。
另一种实施方式中，该通信装置600可以是接入点，或接入点中的装置等。该实施方式中：
通信装置600中，收发器605用于执行图6中的S112的操作；执行图15中的S122的操作；执行图16中的S212的操作；执行图17中的S222的操作；执行图18中的S312的操作；执行图19中的S412的操作；处理器601用于执行图6中的S111的操作；执行图15中的S121的操作；执行图16中的S211的操作；执行图17中的S221的操作；执行图18中的S311的操作；执行图19中的S411的操作。
可见，通信装置600能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。另外，本申请所述的频带范围指示携带了更多的信息，从而有利于节省资源单元指示用于指示各MRU所需的索引个数；或者该通信装置600执行图19的相关操作，可简化处理逻辑，降低站点的处理负担。
其中，上述各实施方式的相关内容可参见上述方法实施例的相关内容。此处不再详述。
在另一种可能的设计中，该收发器可以是收发电路，或者是接口，或者是接口电路。用于实现接收和发送功能的收发电路、接口或接口电路可以是分开的，也可以集成在一起。上述收发电路、接口或接口电路可以用于代码/数据的读写，或者，上述收发电路、接口或接口电路可以用于信号的传输或传递。
在又一种可能的设计中，可选的，处理器601可以存有指令603，指令603在处理器601上运行，可使得所述通信装置600执行上述方法实施例中描述的方法。指令603可能固化在处理器601中，该种情况下，处理器601可能由硬件实现。
在又一种可能的设计中，通信装置600可以包括电路，所述电路可以实现前述方法实施例中发送或接收或者通信的功能。
本申请中描述的处理器和收发器可实现在集成电路(integrated circuit，IC)、模拟IC、射频集成电路RFIC、混合信号IC、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、印刷电路板(printed circuit board，PCB)、电子设备等上。
以上实施例描述中的通信装置可以是接入点或者站点，但本申请中描述的通信装置的范围并不限于此，而且通信装置的结构可以不受图21的限制。通信装置可以是独立的设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。例如所述通信装置可以是：
(1)独立的集成电路IC，或芯片，或，芯片系统或子系统；
(2)具有一个或多个IC的集合，可选的，该IC集合也可以包括用于存储数据，指令的存储部件；
(3)ASIC，例如调制解调器(Modem)；
(4)可嵌入在其他设备内的模块；
(5)接收机、智能终端、无线设备、手持机、移动单元、车载设备、云设备、人工智能设备等等；
(6)其他等等。
对于通信装置可以是芯片或芯片系统的情况，可参见图22所示的芯片的结构示意图。图22所示的芯片700包括处理器701和接口702。其中，处理器701的数量可以是一个或多个，接口702的数量可以是多个。
对于芯片用于实现本申请实施例中站点的功能的情况：
接口702用于执行图6中的S113的操作；执行图15中的S123的操作；执行图16中的S213的操作；执行图17中的S223的操作；执行图18中的S313的操作；执行图19中的S413的操作。处理器701用于执行图6中的S104的操作；执行图15中的S124的操作；执行图16中的S214的操作；执行图17中的S224的操作；执行图18中的S314的操作；执行图19中的S414的操作。
对于芯片用于实现本申请实施例中接入点的功能的情况：
接口702用于执行图6中的S112的操作；执行图15中的S122的操作；执行图16中的S212的操作；执行图17中的S222的操作；执行图18中的S312的操作；执行图19中的S412的操作。处理器701用于执行图6中的S111的操作；执行图15中的S121的操作；执行图16中的S211的操作；执行图17中的S221的操作；执行图18中的S311的操作；执行图19中的S411的操作。
可见，芯片能够为站点分配MRU，使得MRU的分配更加灵活，有助于提升频带利用率。另外，本申请所述的频带范围指示携带了更多的信息，从而有利于节省资源单元指示用于指示各MRU所需的索引个数；或者该芯片执行图19的相关操作，可简化处理逻辑，降低站点的处理负担。
可选的，芯片还包括与处理器701耦合的存储器703，存储器703用于存储终端设备必要的程序指令和数据。
其中，上述各实施方式的相关内容可参见上述方法实施例的相关内容。此处不再详述。
本领域技术人员还可以了解到本申请实施例列出的各种说明性逻辑块(illustrative logical block)和步骤(step)可以通过电子硬件、电脑软件，或两者的结合进行实现。这样的功能是通过硬件还是软件来实现取决于特定的应用和整个系统的设计要求。本领域技术人员可以对于每种特定的应用，可以使用各种方法实现所述的功能，但这种实现不应被理解为超出本申请实施例保护的范围。
本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，其上存储有计算机程序，该计算机可读存储介质被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。
本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品，该计算机程序产品被计算机执行时实现上述任一方法实施例的功能。
在上述实施例中，可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机指令时，全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。所述计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中，或者从一个 计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输，例如，所述计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line，DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如，软盘、硬盘、磁带)、光介质(例如，高密度数字视频光盘(digital video disc，DVD))、或者半导体介质(例如，固态硬盘(solid state disk，SSD))等。
本领域普通技术人员可以理解：本申请中涉及的第一、第二等各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分，并不用来限制本申请实施例的范围，也表示先后顺序。
本申请中各表所示的对应关系可以被配置，也可以是预定义的。各表中的信息的取值仅仅是举例，可以配置为其他值，本申请并不限定。在配置信息与各参数的对应关系时，并不一定要求必须配置各表中示意出的所有对应关系。例如，本申请中的表格中，某些行示出的对应关系也可以不配置。又例如，可以基于上述表格做适当的变形调整，例如，拆分，合并等等。上述各表中标题示出参数的名称也可以采用通信装置可理解的其他名称，其参数的取值或表示方式也可以通信装置可理解的其他取值或表示方式。上述各表在实现时，也可以采用其他的数据结构，例如可以采用数组、队列、容器、栈、线性表、指针、链表、树、图、结构体、类、堆、散列表或哈希表等。
本申请中的预定义可以理解为定义、预先定义、存储、预存储、预协商、预配置、固化、或预烧制。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (27)

  1. 一种资源单元指示方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    站点接收来自接入点的触发帧，所述触发帧包括用于指示给所述站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段采用7比特和2比特的模式；所述2比特用于指示某个80MHz位置；所述7比特用于指示所述2比特确定了某个80MHz情况下的资源单元RU/多资源单元MRU的具体位置；
    所述2比特的主从指示为比特BS和比特B0；所述2比特(BSB0)的指示形式是：00指示主(Primary)80MHz(P80MHz)，01指示从(Secondary)80MHz(S80MHz)，10指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较低的80MHz，11指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较高的80MHz；
    所述站点确定所述2比特的主从指示对应的绝对指示；
    所述站点根据所述绝对指示以及所述7比特的值，确定所述站点被分配的所述RU/MRU。
  2. 一种资源单元指示方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    接入点确定触发帧，所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段采用7比特和2比特的模式；所述2比特用于指示某个80MHz位置；所述7比特用于指示所述2比特确定了某个80MHz情况下的资源单元RU/多资源单元MRU的具体位置；
    所述2比特的主从指示为比特BS和比特B0；所述2比特(BSB0)的指示形式是：00指示主(Primary)80MHz(P80MHz)，01指示从(Secondary)80MHz(S80MHz)，10指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较低的80MHz，11指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较高的80MHz；
    所述接入点发送所述触发帧。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述2比特的主从指示，指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况：
    所述情况Case a，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz；
    所述Case b，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz；
    所述Case c，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz；
    所述Case d，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz；
    所述Case a，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；
    所述Case b，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高 80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；
    所述Case c，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应；
    所述Case d，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应。
  4. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述2比特的绝对指示为X1、X0；N用来计算所述RU/MRU在频域范围内的实际位置，所述N＝2*X1+X0。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，所述2比特的主从指示，指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况：
    所述情况Case a，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz；
    所述Case b，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz；
    所述Case c，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz；
    所述Case d，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz；
    所述Case a，所述2比特为00，所述N等于0；所述2比特为01，所述N等于1；所述2比特为10，所述N等于2；所述2比特为11，所述N等于3；
    所述Case b，所述2比特为00，所述N等于1；所述2比特为01，所述N等于0；所述2比特为10，所述N等于2；所述2比特为11，所述N等于3；
    所述Case c，所述2比特为00，所述N等于2；所述2比特为01，所述N等于3；所述2比特为10，所述N等于0；所述2比特为11，所述N等于1；
    所述Case d，所述2比特为00，所述N等于3；所述2比特为01，所述N等于2；所述2比特为10，所述N等于0；所述2比特为11，所述N等于1。
  6. 根据权利要求4所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述2比特的主从指示，指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况：
    所述情况Case a，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz；
    所述Case b，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz；
    所述Case c，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz；
    所述Case d，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz；
    所述Case a，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所 述B0等于0时N等于0，所述B0等于1时N等于1；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于2，所述B0等于1时N等于3；
    所述Case b，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于1，所述B0等于1时N等于0；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于2，所述B0等于1时N等于3；
    所述Case c，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于2，所述B0等于1时N等于3；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于0，所述B0等于1时N等于1；
    所述Case d，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于3，所述B0等于1时N等于2；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于0，所述B0等于1时N等于1。
  7. 根据权利要求1至6任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    针对同一大小的RU/MRU，其索引数按照从小到大的顺序与RU/MRU的起始频率从低到高的顺序对应。
  8. 根据权利要求1至6任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    针对同一大小的RU/MRU，其索引数按照从小到大的顺序与RU/MRU中打孔的RU的起始频率从低到高的顺序对应。
  9. 一种站点，其特征在于，包括：
    通信单元，用于接收来自接入点的触发帧，所述触发帧包括用于指示给所述站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段采用7比特和2比特的模式；所述2比特用于指示某个80MHz位置；所述7比特用于指示所述2比特确定了某个80MHz情况下的资源单元RU/多资源单元MRU的具体位置；
    所述2比特的主从指示为比特BS和比特B0；所述2比特(BSB0)的指示形式是：00指示主(Primary)80MHz(P80MHz)，01指示从(Secondary)80MHz(S80MHz)，10指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较低的80MHz，11指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较高的80MHz；
    处理单元，用于确定所述2比特的主从指示对应的绝对指示；
    所述处理单元，还用于根据所述绝对指示以及所述7比特的值，确定所述站点被分配的所述RU/MRU。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的站点，其特征在于，所述2比特的主从指示，指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况：
    所述情况Case a，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz；
    所述Case b，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz；
    所述Case c，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz；
    所述Case d，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz；
    所述Case a，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz， 与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；
    所述Case b，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；
    所述Case c，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应；
    所述Case d，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应。
  11. 根据权利要求9所述的站点，其特征在于，
    所述2比特的绝对指示为X1、X0；N用来计算所述RU/MRU在频域范围内的实际位置，所述N＝2*X1+X0。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的站点，其特征在于，所述2比特的主从指示，指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况：
    所述情况Case a，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz；
    所述Case b，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz；
    所述Case c，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz；
    所述Case d，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz；
    所述Case a，所述2比特为00，所述N等于0；所述2比特为01，所述N等于1；所述2比特为10，所述N等于2；所述2比特为11，所述N等于3；
    所述Case b，所述2比特为00，所述N等于1；所述2比特为01，所述N等于0；所述2比特为10，所述N等于2；所述2比特为11，所述N等于3；
    所述Case c，所述2比特为00，所述N等于2；所述2比特为01，所述N等于3；所述2比特为10，所述N等于0；所述2比特为11，所述N等于1；
    所述Case d，所述2比特为00，所述N等于3；所述2比特为01，所述N等于2；所述2比特为10，所述N等于0；所述2比特为11，所述N等于1。
  13. 根据权利要求11所述的站点，其特征在于，
    所述2比特的主从指示，指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况：
    所述情况Case a，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz；
    所述Case b，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz；
    所述Case c，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz；
    所述Case d，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz；
    所述Case a，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于0，所述B0等于1时N等于1；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于2，所述B0等于1时N等于3；
    所述Case b，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于1，所述B0等于1时N等于0；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于2，所述B0等于1时N等于3；
    所述Case c，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于2，所述B0等于1时N等于3；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于0，所述B0等于1时N等于1；
    所述Case d，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于3，所述B0等于1时N等于2；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于0，所述B0等于1时N等于1。
  14. 根据权利要求9至13任一项所述的站点，其特征在于，
    针对同一大小的RU/MRU，其索引数按照从小到大的顺序与RU/MRU的起始频率从低到高的顺序对应。
  15. 根据权利要求9至13任一项所述的站点，其特征在于，
    针对同一大小的RU/MRU，其索引数按照从小到大的顺序与RU/MRU中打孔的RU(即该RU/MRU未包括的RU)的起始频率从低到高的顺序对应。
  16. 一种接入点，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于确定触发帧，所述触发帧包括用于指示给站点分配资源的资源单元分配子字段，所述资源单元分配子字段采用7比特和2比特的模式；所述2比特用于指示某个80MHz位置；所述7比特用于指示所述2比特确定了某个80MHz情况下的资源单元RU/多资源单元MRU的具体位置；
    所述2比特的主从指示为比特BS和比特B0；所述2比特(BSB0)的指示形式是：00指示主(Primary)80MHz(P80MHz)，01指示从(Secondary)80MHz(S80MHz)，10指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较低的80MHz，11指示从160MHz(S160MHz)中的频率较高的80MHz；
    通信单元，用于发送所述触发帧。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的接入点，其特征在于，所述2比特的主从指示，指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况：
    所述情况Case a，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz；
    所述Case b，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz；
    所述Case c，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz；
    所述Case d，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz；
    所述Case a，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；
    所述Case b，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；
    所述Case c，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应；
    所述Case d，所述2比特为00的主从指示指示了主80MHz，与所述2比特为00的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为01的主从指示指示了从80MHz，与所述2比特为01的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次高80MHz相对应；所述2比特为10的主从指示指示了第三个80MHz，与所述2比特为10的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的最低80MHz相对应；所述2比特为11的主从指示指示了第四个80MHz，与所述2比特为11的绝对指示指示了绝对频率中的次低80MHz相对应。
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的接入点，其特征在于，
    所述2比特的绝对指示为X1、X0；N用来计算所述RU/MRU在频域范围内的实际位置，所述N＝2*X1+X0。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的接入点，其特征在于，所述2比特的主从指示，指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况：
    所述情况Case a，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz；
    所述Case b，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz；
    所述Case c，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz；
    所述Case d，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz；
    所述Case a，所述2比特为00，所述N等于0；所述2比特为01，所述N等于1；所述2比特为10，所述N等于2；所述2比特为11，所述N等于3；
    所述Case b，所述2比特为00，所述N等于1；所述2比特为01，所述N等于0；所述2比特为10，所述N等于2；所述2比特为11，所述N等于3；
    所述Case c，所述2比特为00，所述N等于2；所述2比特为01，所述N等于3；所述2比特为10，所述N等于0；所述2比特为11，所述N等于1；
    所述Case d，所述2比特为00，所述N等于3；所述2比特为01，所述N等于2；所述2比特为10，所述N等于0；所述2比特为11，所述N等于1。
  20. 根据权利要求18所述的接入点，其特征在于，
    所述2比特的主从指示，指示了主80MHz在320MHz中的位置的4种主从情况：
    所述情况Case a，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最低80MHz；
    所述Case b，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次低80MHz；
    所述Case c，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的次高80MHz；
    所述Case d，所述主80MHz在绝对频率的最高80MHz；
    所述Case a，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于0，所述B0等于1时N等于1；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于2，所述B0等于1时N等于3；
    所述Case b，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于1，所述B0等于1时N等于0；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于2，所述B0等于1时N等于3；
    所述Case c，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于2，所述B0等于1时N等于3；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于0，所述B0等于1时N等于1；
    所述Case d，所述BS等于0时表示所述RU/MRU属于主160MHz，在主160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于3，所述B0等于1时N等于2；所述BS等于1时表示所述RU/MRU属于从160MHz，在从160MHz中所述B0等于0时N等于0，所述B0等于1时N等于1。
  21. 根据权利要求16至20任一项所述的接入点，其特征在于，
    针对同一大小的RU/MRU，其索引数按照从小到大的顺序与RU/MRU的起始频率从低到高的顺序对应。
  22. 根据权利要求16至20任一项所述的接入点，其特征在于，
    针对同一大小的RU/MRU，其索引数按照从小到大的顺序与RU/MRU中打孔的RU(即该RU/MRU未包括的RU)的起始频率从低到高的顺序对应。
  23. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储指令，当所述指令被执行时，使得如权利要求1、或3至8任一项所述的方法被实现。
  24. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质用于存储指令，当所述指令被执行时，使得如权利要求2至8任一项所述的方法被实现。
  25. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括至少一个处理器和接口，所述接口用于获取计算机程序， 所述处理器用于调用所述计算机程序以执行权利要求1、或3至8任一项所述的方法，或以执行权利要求2至8任一项所述的方法。
  26. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器和存储器，所述存储器用于存储指令或计算机程序，所述处理器用于执行所述存储器所存储的计算机程序或指令，以使所述通信装置执行权利要求1、或3至8任一项所述的方法。
  27. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理器和存储器，所述存储器用于存储指令或计算机程序，所述处理器用于执行所述存储器所存储的计算机程序或指令，以使所述通信装置执行权利要求2至8任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2021/116560 2020-09-04 2021-09-03 资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点 WO2022048655A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
EP21863717.1A EP4203583A4 (en) 2020-09-04 2021-09-03 RESOURCE UNIT DISPLAY METHOD, ACCESS POINT AND STATION
US18/178,168 US20230209525A1 (en) 2020-09-04 2023-03-03 Resource Unit Indication Method, Access Point, and Station

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202010923701.8 2020-09-04
CN202010923701 2020-09-04
CN202011395419.3 2020-12-02
CN202011395419 2020-12-02
CN202110009966.1 2021-01-05
CN202110009966.1A CN114143877A (zh) 2020-09-04 2021-01-05 资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/178,168 Continuation US20230209525A1 (en) 2020-09-04 2023-03-03 Resource Unit Indication Method, Access Point, and Station

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022048655A1 true WO2022048655A1 (zh) 2022-03-10

Family

ID=80438545

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/116560 WO2022048655A1 (zh) 2020-09-04 2021-09-03 资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点
PCT/CN2021/116559 WO2022048654A1 (zh) 2020-09-04 2021-09-03 资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点

Family Applications After (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2021/116559 WO2022048654A1 (zh) 2020-09-04 2021-09-03 资源单元指示方法、接入点及站点

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (3) US12004140B2 (zh)
EP (2) EP4203543A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP2023539906A (zh)
KR (1) KR20230058516A (zh)
CN (3) CN114143877A (zh)
WO (2) WO2022048655A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP4064773A4 (en) * 2019-11-21 2022-12-28 LG Electronics Inc. METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING A PPDU VIA MULTIPLE RUs IN A WIRELESS LAN SYSTEM

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160353414A1 (en) * 2015-05-26 2016-12-01 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for limiting resources for device-to-device operation in wireless communication system
US20170325202A1 (en) * 2016-05-06 2017-11-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Trigger frame in wireless local area network
CN107509252A (zh) * 2016-06-14 2017-12-22 华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输方法及装置
CN108781445A (zh) * 2016-03-11 2018-11-09 日本电气株式会社 无线lan系统、无线lan基站、无线lan终端和通信方法
CN110768757A (zh) * 2018-07-25 2020-02-07 华为技术有限公司 资源单元指示方法、装置及存储介质

Family Cites Families (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170041928A1 (en) * 2015-08-04 2017-02-09 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for generating sequence for stf field in wireless lan system
US20180324685A1 (en) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-08 Qualcomm Incorporated Indicating upcoming random access trigger frame via fast initial link setup discovery frame
US11109278B2 (en) * 2017-10-20 2021-08-31 Qualcomm Incorporated Multiplexing clients of different generations in trigger-based transmissions
US11057880B2 (en) 2018-06-11 2021-07-06 Qualcomm Incorporated Wireless communication with per-station punctured transmissions
WO2019240416A1 (ko) * 2018-06-15 2019-12-19 엘지전자 주식회사 무선랜 시스템에서 톤 플랜을 기반으로 데이터를 송수신하는 방법 및 장치
US11490261B2 (en) * 2018-07-10 2022-11-01 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and device for transmitting data in wireless LAN system
CN110730050A (zh) * 2018-07-17 2020-01-24 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及装置
WO2020027847A1 (en) * 2018-08-02 2020-02-06 Intel IP Corporation Methods and apparatus to generate and process management frames
CN116546632A (zh) * 2018-08-24 2023-08-04 华为技术有限公司 一种资源划分方法、资源指示方法以及相关装置
JP6688418B1 (ja) 2019-04-16 2020-04-28 ジェネシスヘルスケア株式会社 ２型糖尿病のリスクを判定する方法
US11438968B2 (en) * 2019-10-29 2022-09-06 Intel Corporation Non-contiguous resource units for wireless local-area networks (WLANs)
US20230016370A1 (en) * 2020-02-20 2023-01-19 Wilus Institute Of Standards And Technology Inc. Method for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system, and wireless communication terminal
US11671943B2 (en) * 2020-04-06 2023-06-06 Lg Electronics Inc. Techniques for allocating a resource unit in wireless local area network system
US20210360628A1 (en) * 2020-05-15 2021-11-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Apparatus and method of communication based on extended bandwidth and multi-resource unit in wireless local area network system
US11937230B2 (en) * 2020-06-16 2024-03-19 Nxp Usa, Inc. Method and apparatus for wireless communications

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20160353414A1 (en) * 2015-05-26 2016-12-01 Lg Electronics Inc. Method and apparatus for limiting resources for device-to-device operation in wireless communication system
CN108781445A (zh) * 2016-03-11 2018-11-09 日本电气株式会社 无线lan系统、无线lan基站、无线lan终端和通信方法
US20170325202A1 (en) * 2016-05-06 2017-11-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Trigger frame in wireless local area network
CN107509252A (zh) * 2016-06-14 2017-12-22 华为技术有限公司 一种数据传输方法及装置
CN110768757A (zh) * 2018-07-25 2020-02-07 华为技术有限公司 资源单元指示方法、装置及存储介质

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4203583A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP4203583A4 (en) 2024-01-10
US20230209524A1 (en) 2023-06-29
US12004140B2 (en) 2024-06-04
CN116234029B (zh) 2024-03-01
CN116234029A (zh) 2023-06-06
WO2022048654A1 (zh) 2022-03-10
JP2023539906A (ja) 2023-09-20
CN114143877A (zh) 2022-03-04
US20230209525A1 (en) 2023-06-29
KR20230058516A (ko) 2023-05-03
EP4203543A4 (en) 2024-01-17
EP4203543A1 (en) 2023-06-28
EP4203583A1 (en) 2023-06-28
US20240306134A1 (en) 2024-09-12
CN116390244A (zh) 2023-07-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022022249A1 (zh) 资源调度方法及相关装置
WO2021008376A1 (zh) 多用户多输入多输出的用户数指示方法和通信装置
AU2021205564B2 (en) Resource allocation method, communication apparatus and related device
WO2021233233A1 (zh) 空数据分组声明帧的传输方法及相关装置
WO2021139765A1 (zh) 资源单元合并指示的方法和通信装置
CN113395143B (zh) 数据传输方法及设备、芯片系统、计算机可读存储介质
JP7540001B2 (ja) 無線ローカルエリアネットワークにおいて適用される帯域幅指示方法及び通信装置
EP4104300A1 (en) Communication apparatus and communication method for control signaling
US20240306134A1 (en) Resource unit indication method, access point, and station
WO2022257836A1 (zh) Ppdu传输方法及相关装置
WO2021238585A1 (zh) 数据传输方法及相关装置
US20230403126A1 (en) Method for transmitting physical layer protocol data unit and communication apparatus
WO2024016962A1 (zh) 一种无线局域网中的通信方法及通信装置
WO2023030481A1 (zh) 物理层协议数据单元传输方法及相关装置
WO2023142975A1 (zh) 一种信道探测方法及装置
KR20240017018A (ko) 물리 계층 프로토콜 데이터 유닛 전송 방법, 트리거 프레임 전송 방법 및 장치
CN118074855A (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN114679746A (zh) 基于循环移位分集序列的通信方法、装置及系统

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21863717

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112023004148

Country of ref document: BR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202337024446

Country of ref document: IN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021863717

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230323

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112023004148

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20230306